ImageCLASS MF249dw / MF247dw MF236n User's Guide Manual Users Us EN 1

User Manual: Manual Canon imageCLASS MF249dw User Manual | Manual Device

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 715 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

imageCLASS
MF249dw / MF247dw / MF236n
User's Guide
USRMA-1354-00 2017-05 en Copyright CANON INC. 2017
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ........................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply ............................................................................................................................................................ 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections .................................................................................................................................... 9
Consumables .......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 17
Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 18
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Manual Feed Slot ................................................................................................................................................ 23
Paper Drawer ..................................................................................................................................................... 24
Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 25
Display ........................................................................................................................................................ 28
Customizing the <Home> Screen .................................................................................................................... 33
Using the Display .................................................................................................................................................... 35
Entering Text .......................................................................................................................................................... 38
Placing Documents ................................................................................................................................................. 41
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................................................................... 45
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ....................................................................................................................... 47
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot .................................................................................................................. 50
Loading Envelopes .............................................................................................................................................. 52
Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................... 54
Specifying Paper Size and Type ............................................................................................................................. 56
Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................... 58
Registering in the Address Book .............................................................................................................................. 60
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ........................................................................................................ 61
Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial .......................................................................................................... 65
Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial .................................................................................................... 69
Adjusting the Volume .............................................................................................................................................. 72
Entering Quiet Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 74
Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................... 76
Copying ................................................................................................................................................................ 79
Basic Copy Operations ............................................................................................................................................. 81
Canceling Copies ..................................................................................................................................................... 83
Various Copy Settings .............................................................................................................................................. 85
Enlarging or Reducing ......................................................................................................................................... 86
Selecting Document Type .................................................................................................................................... 87
I
Adjusting Density ............................................................................................................................................... 88
Adjusting Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................... 89
2-Sided Copying (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................................................................................. 91
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) ................................................................................... 94
Using the <Paper Save> Button ............................................................................................................................ 96
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page .................................................................................................... 98
Collating Copies by Page ..................................................................................................................................... 99
Changing Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 100
Faxing .................................................................................................................................................................. 103
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ......................................................................................................... 106
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use ............................................................................................................ 107
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name ........................................................................................................ 108
Selecting the Receive Mode ............................................................................................................................... 110
Connecting the Telephone Line .......................................................................................................................... 112
Sending Faxes ....................................................................................................................................................... 114
Sending from Registered Destinations ................................................................................................................ 120
Specifying from Address Book ...................................................................................................................... 121
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers ...................................................................... 124
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons ....................................................................................... 127
Specifying Previously Used Destinations ........................................................................................................ 130
Various Fax Settings .......................................................................................................................................... 133
Adjusting Resolution ................................................................................................................................... 134
Adjusting Density ....................................................................................................................................... 135
Adjusting Sharpness ................................................................................................................................... 136
Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF249dw) ...................................................................................................... 138
Changing Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 139
Canceling Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................... 140
Receiving Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 142
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes ....................................................................................... 146
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending) .......................................................................................... 147
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast) ........................................................ 148
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) ..................................................................................... 150
Forwarding Received Faxes ................................................................................................................................ 154
Selecting a Document to Forward ................................................................................................................. 155
Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................... 157
Receiving Fax Information Services ..................................................................................................................... 161
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents .................................................................................... 163
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software ...................................................................... 165
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .......................................................................................................... 167
Sending PC Faxes ............................................................................................................................................. 168
Attaching Cover Sheets to PC Faxes .................................................................................................................... 171
Using Address Book for PC Faxes ........................................................................................................................ 175
Registering Destinations ............................................................................................................................. 178
Using Registered Destinations ..................................................................................................................... 182
II
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data from the Fax Driver ........................................................................... 184
Using the Machine as a Printer ..................................................................................................... 189
Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 190
Printing a Document ......................................................................................................................................... 191
Canceling Prints ............................................................................................................................................... 195
Checking the Printing Status .............................................................................................................................. 198
Various Print Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 199
Enlarging or Reducing ................................................................................................................................. 201
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF249dw / MF247dw) ......................................................................... 203
Collating Printouts by Page .......................................................................................................................... 205
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet ........................................................................................................ 207
Printing Posters .......................................................................................................................................... 209
Printing Booklet (MF249dw / MF247dw) ......................................................................................................... 211
Printing Borders ......................................................................................................................................... 213
Printing Dates and Page Numbers ................................................................................................................ 214
Printing Watermarks ................................................................................................................................... 216
Selecting Document Type ............................................................................................................................ 218
Saving Toner .............................................................................................................................................. 220
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents ................................................................................................. 222
Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs ............................................................................................................. 226
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings ............................................................................ 227
Changing Default Settings ........................................................................................................................... 229
Using the Machine as a Scanner ................................................................................................... 232
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ............................................................................................................ 233
Scanning from the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 234
Scanning Using the <Scan -> PC> Button ............................................................................................................. 237
Scanning from a Computer .................................................................................................................................... 241
Scanning Using an Application ........................................................................................................................... 242
Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF ........................................................................................................... 244
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation (MF249dw / MF247dw) ........................................................ 245
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine ..................................................................................... 246
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder ........................................................................................................ 253
Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) ........................................................................................... 256
Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................................................................... 258
Specifying a Scanning Size ........................................................................................................................... 260
Setting Color Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 261
Selecting a File Format ................................................................................................................................ 262
Adjusting Density ....................................................................................................................................... 264
Specifying Orientation of Your Document ...................................................................................................... 265
Selecting Document Type ............................................................................................................................ 266
Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF249dw) ...................................................................................................... 267
Adjusting Sharpness ................................................................................................................................... 268
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality ................................................................................... 270
Setting Gamma Values ................................................................................................................................ 271
Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-Mail/Shared Folder) ............................................................................... 272
III
Specifying from Address Book ...................................................................................................................... 273
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers ...................................................................... 276
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons ....................................................................................... 279
Specifying Previously Used Destinations ........................................................................................................ 281
Changing Default Settings ........................................................................................................................... 284
Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) ...................................................................... 286
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................... 289
Connecting to a Mobile Device ............................................................................................................................... 290
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw) ...................................................................... 291
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications ................................................................................. 294
Using AirPrint ................................................................................................................................................... 295
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 300
Scanning with AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 303
Faxing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 305
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ........................................................................................................................... 307
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 308
Managing the Machine Remotely .......................................................................................................................... 312
Network ............................................................................................................................................................ 314
Connecting to a Network ...................................................................................................................................... 315
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw) .................................................................................. 317
Connecting to a Wired LAN ................................................................................................................................ 318
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw) ............................................................................................ 319
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ..................................................................................... 321
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ......................................................................................... 323
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ..................................................................................... 326
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings .................................................................................... 329
Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................. 333
Setting IP Addresses ......................................................................................................................................... 336
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................... 337
Setting IPv6 Addresses ................................................................................................................................ 340
Viewing Network Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 344
Conguring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a Computer ........................................................................... 347
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ............................................................................................... 348
Conguring Printer Ports ................................................................................................................................... 351
Setting Up Print Server ...................................................................................................................................... 354
Conguring Scan Settings (E-Mail/Shared Folders) (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................................ 357
Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail) .......................................................................................................... 358
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings ................................................................................................................. 359
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings .................................................................................................. 363
Conguring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders ....................................................................................... 367
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .................................................................................................... 368
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ....................................................................................... 372
Conguring Ethernet Settings ............................................................................................................................ 373
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit .......................................................................................................... 375
IV
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................. 376
Conguring DNS .............................................................................................................................................. 377
Conguring SMB (MF249dw / MF247dw) ............................................................................................................. 382
Conguring SNTP ............................................................................................................................................. 384
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................................. 386
Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 392
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................ 393
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 394
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................... 396
Setting the System Manager PIN .................................................................................................................. 397
Setting a Remote UI PIN .............................................................................................................................. 399
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ...................................................................................................... 401
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ...................................................................................................... 402
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules .................................................................................................. 406
Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 409
Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 411
Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 413
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions .................................................................................... 414
Setting a PIN for Address Book ..................................................................................................................... 415
Limiting Available Destinations ..................................................................................................................... 417
Prohibiting PC Faxing .................................................................................................................................. 418
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations ............................................................................................... 419
Checking Destinations before Sending Documents ......................................................................................... 420
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting ............................................................................................................. 422
Disabling HTTP Communication .......................................................................................................................... 423
Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 424
Implementing Robust Security Features ................................................................................................................ 425
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI ................................................................................... 426
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ............................................................................................................... 429
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ...................................................................................... 434
Generating Key Pairs ................................................................................................................................... 436
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................................... 443
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ..................................................................................................... 446
Using Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................ 449
Starting Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................... 450
Remote UI Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 452
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status ........................................................................................ 456
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ............................................................................................................. 461
Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI ....................................................................................................... 463
Registering Address Book from Remote UI ............................................................................................................. 467
Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 472
Network Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 473
V
Preferences .......................................................................................................................................................... 483
Timer Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 489
Common Settings (MF249dw / MF247dw) ............................................................................................................... 493
Copy Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 495
Fax Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 497
Scan Settings ........................................................................................................................................................ 508
Printer Settings .................................................................................................................................................... 513
Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 523
System Management Settings ............................................................................................................................... 529
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 539
Clearing Jams ........................................................................................................................................................ 541
When an Error Message Appears ........................................................................................................................... 549
When an Error Code Appears ................................................................................................................................. 559
Common Problems ................................................................................................................................................ 565
Installation/Settings Problems ........................................................................................................................... 566
Copy/Printing Problems .................................................................................................................................... 570
Faxing/Telephone Problems ............................................................................................................................... 573
When You Cannot Print Properly ............................................................................................................................ 575
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ................................................................................................................... 577
Paper Creases or Curls ...................................................................................................................................... 582
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ..................................................................................................................................... 584
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved ......................................................................................................................... 586
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 588
Cleaning the Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 589
Exterior ........................................................................................................................................................... 590
Platen Glass ..................................................................................................................................................... 591
Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 594
Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 595
Machine Interior ............................................................................................................................................... 596
Replacing Toner Cartridges ................................................................................................................................... 598
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge ................................................................................................................. 601
How to Replace Toner Cartridges ........................................................................................................................ 603
Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 606
Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 608
TX Result Report ............................................................................................................................................... 609
Communication Management Report ................................................................................................................. 612
RX Result Report ............................................................................................................................................... 614
Consumables Status Report ............................................................................................................................... 615
Eco Report ....................................................................................................................................................... 616
PCL Font List (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................................................................................... 617
Address Book List ............................................................................................................................................. 618
User Data List .................................................................................................................................................. 620
VI
Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 621
Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 622
Initializing Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 623
Initializing Address Book ................................................................................................................................... 625
Initialize Eco Report Counter .............................................................................................................................. 626
Initializing All Data/Settings ............................................................................................................................... 627
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 629
Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 630
Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 631
Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 632
Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 635
Going Digital .................................................................................................................................................... 637
So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 640
Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 643
Machine Specications ...................................................................................................................................... 644
Wireless LAN Specications (MF249dw / MF247dw) ............................................................................................... 646
Document Type ................................................................................................................................................ 647
Scan Area .................................................................................................................................................. 648
Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 649
Copy Specications ........................................................................................................................................... 652
Fax Specications ............................................................................................................................................. 653
Scanner Specications ....................................................................................................................................... 654
Printer Specications ........................................................................................................................................ 655
Specications for E-Mail Sending and Receiving (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................................... 656
Specications for Scanning to Shared Folders (MF249dw / MF247dw) ...................................................................... 657
Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 658
Manuals Included with the Machine ...................................................................................................................... 659
Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 660
Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 661
Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 665
Others .................................................................................................................................................................. 666
Basic Windows Operations ................................................................................................................................. 667
Menu Route Map .............................................................................................................................................. 676
Notice ............................................................................................................................................................. 677
VII
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 9
Consumables ....................................................................................................................................................... 10
Important Safety Instructions
1
Important Safety Instructions
1469-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Important Safety Instructions
2
Installation
1469-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a re or electrical shock
●A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, rugs, or similar objects)
●A damp or dusty location
●A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
●A location subject to high temperatures
●A location exposed to open ames
●Near alcohol, paint thinners or other ammable substances
Other warnings
●Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers lled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When installing and removing the optional accessories, be sure to turn OFF the power, unplug the power
plug, and then disconnect all the interface cables and power cord from the machine. Otherwise, the power
cord or interface cables may be damaged, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not use near any medical equipment. Radiowaves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical
equipment, which may cause a malfunction and result in serious accidents.
●If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
●Unstable location
●Location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
●When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
●When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the oor or
walls, or between the paper drawers. Doing so may result in injury.
Important Safety Instructions
3
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
●A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
●A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
●A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
●A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
●A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
This machine generates a slight amount of ozone, etc. during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone, etc.
may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone, etc. may be more noticeable during extended use or long
production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room where the machine
operates be appropriately ventilated to maintain a comfortable working environment. Also avoid locations
where people would be exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed is
heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location. Using
the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the machine. Let
the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
When using wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)
●Set the machine at a distance of 164´ (50 m) or less from the wireless LAN router.
●Do not set machine in a location where any object blocks communication. The signal may be degraded when
passing through walls or oors.
●Keep the machine as far as possible from digital cordless phones, microwave ovens, or other equipment that
emit radio waves.
In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher
Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters above
sea level, or higher.
Connecting the Telephone Line
This machine conforms to an analog telephone line standard. The machine can be connected to the public
switched telephone network (PSTN) only.
If you connect the machine to a digital telephone line or a dedicated telephone line, it might impede proper
operation of the machine and could be the cause of damage. Make sure to conrm a type of telephone line
before connecting the machine.
Contact your optical ber line or IP telephone line service providers if you want to connect the machine to those
telephone lines.
Important Safety Instructions
4
Power Supply
1469-002
This machine is compatible with voltages of 110 to 127 V, and electrical frequency of 50/60 Hz.
●Use only a power supply that meets the specied voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a re
or electrical shock.
●Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
●Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
●Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a re or
electrical shock.
●Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a re, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sucient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
●Do not connect the machine to an uninterruptible power source.
●If plugging this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
●Do not connect the power cord into the auxiliary outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
Important Safety Instructions
5
Handling
1469-003
●Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are high-
voltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
●Do not use ammable sprays near this machine. If ammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a re or electrical shock.
●When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a re or electrical shock.
●When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
This machine generates a low level magnetic ux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please
move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
●Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
●For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
●Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
●Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
●The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact
with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use
caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.
Important Safety Instructions
6
●When copying with a thick book placed on the platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully. Doing so may
damage the platen glass and result in injury.
●Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary, on the platen glass. Doing so may damage the
platen glass and result in injury.
Laser beam
●If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
●Remove the toner cartridges.
●Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
●Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be Installed in a place other than the oce.
Other precautions
●Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.
●Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
●Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
●Do not touch the contacts ( ). Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
●Do not turn OFF the machine during printing. Also, do not open and close the cover and do not remove or
insert paper during printing. Doing so can cause paper jams.
●Use a telephone cable with a length of 118" (3 m) or less.
Important Safety Instructions
7
●The display is a touch panel. Press gently to operate. Avoid pressing with a mechanical pencil, ballpoint pen,
or other pointed object. Doing so may scratch or damage the touch panel's surface.
Important Safety Instructions
8
Maintenance and Inspections
1469-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting(P. 539) . If the problem cannot be
resolved or you feel the machine requires an inspection, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 586) .
●Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a re or electrical shock.
●Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a re if it comes into contact with electricity.
●Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzenes, paint thinners, or other ammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels.
If these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a re or electrical shock.
●Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a re or electrical
shock.
●The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
●When loading paper or removing jammed documents or paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the
edges of the paper.
When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or
clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
Important Safety Instructions
9
Consumables
1469-005
●Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open ames. Also, do not store toner cartridges or paper in a
location exposed to open ames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in burns or re.
●If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a
soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
Toner cartridges generate a low level magnetic ux. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities,
please move away from toner cartridges and consult your physician immediately.
●Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
●Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
●Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
●Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
●Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
●Remove the sealing tape of the toner cartridge completely without using excessive force. Doing otherwise
may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
●Hold the toner cartridge correctly as shown. Do not stand it up or turn it upside-down.
●Do not touch the toner cartridge memory ( ) or the electrical contacts ( ).
Important Safety Instructions
10
●Do not scratch the drum surface ( ) or expose it to light.
●Do not remove the toner cartridge from this machine or from the protective bag unnecessarily.
●The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep it away from oppy disks, disk drives, and other devices that
can be affected by magnetism. Failure to do so may result in data loss.
Storing the toner cartridge
●Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 32 to 95°F (0 to 35°C)
Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
●Store without opening until the toner cartridge is to be used.
●When removing the toner cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed toner cartridge into
the original protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
●When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not
return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
* Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge if there is a
difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge. Condensation will adversely affect the print quality of
toner cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge in the following locations
●Locations exposed to open ames
●Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for ve minutes or more
●Locations exposed to excessive salty air
●Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
●Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
●Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
●Locations with a large amount of dust
●Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner
cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any
malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
Important Safety Instructions
11
Availability period of repairing parts and toner cartridges
The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine will be available for at least seven (7) years after
production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Toner cartridge packing materials
●Save the protective bag for the toner cartridge. They are required when transporting this machine.
●The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
●Dispose of the removed sealing tape according to local regulations.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge
Place the toner container into its protective bag to prevent the toner from scattering, and then dispose of the
toner cartridge according to local regulations.
Important Safety Instructions
12
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 14
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 17
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 18
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 22
Manual Feed Slot ............................................................................................................................................ 23
Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................................................. 24
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 25
Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Customizing the <Home> Screen ............................................................................................................. 33
Using the Display ................................................................................................................................................. 35
Entering Text ....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Placing Documents .............................................................................................................................................. 41
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 45
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer ................................................................................................................ 47
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot .......................................................................................................... 50
Loading Envelopes .......................................................................................................................................... 52
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................... 54
Specifying Paper Size and Type ....................................................................................................................... 56
Registering a Custom Paper Size ............................................................................................................. 58
Registering in the Address Book ........................................................................................................................ 60
Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................ 61
Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial .................................................................................................. 65
Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial ........................................................................................... 69
Adjusting the Volume .......................................................................................................................................... 72
Entering Quiet Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 74
Entering Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................................................... 76
Basic Operations
13
Basic Operations
1469-006
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper and
documents, that are frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 17)
◼Using the Display
This section describes how to toggle the display and select items. Using the Display(P. 35)
◼Entering Text
This section describes how to enter characters and numbers for registering destinations to the Address Book, sending
faxes, etc. Entering Text(P. 38)
◼Placing Documents
This section describes how to place documents on the platen glass and in the feeder. Placing Documents(P. 41)
Basic Operations
14
◼Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the paper drawer and manual feed slot. Loading Paper(P. 45)
◼Registering in the Address Book
This section describes how to register destinations for sending faxes or scanned documents. Registering in the
Address Book(P. 60)
◼Adjusting the Volume
This section describes how to adjust the volume of various machine sounds, such as those produced when fax sending
is complete or when an error occurs. Adjusting the Volume(P. 72)
◼Entering Quiet Mode
This section describes how to place the machine in quiet mode to reduce operation sound. Entering Quiet
Mode(P. 74)
Basic Operations
15
◼Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes how to set the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 76)
Basic Operations
16
Parts and Their Functions
1469-007
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In
addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as placing documents, loading paper,
and replacing the toner cartridges, this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this
section for tips on how to use the machine properly.
Front Side(P. 18)
Back Side(P. 20)
Interior(P. 22)
Manual Feed Slot(P. 23)
Paper Drawer(P. 24)
Operation Panel(P. 25)
Basic Operations
17
Front Side
1469-008
Document feeder tray
Open to load an original in the feeder. Placing Documents(P. 41)
Feeder
Automatically feeds documents into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets are loaded in the
feeder, documents can be scanned continuously. Placing Documents(P. 41)
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of keys such as the numeric keys and [Start] key, a display, and status indicators.
You can perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel. You can move it up or
down so it is easier to operate. Operation Panel(P. 25) Display(P. 28)
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 606)
Power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Paper stopper
Prevents paper that has been output after printing from falling.
Basic Operations
18
Manual feed slot
Load the paper into the manual feed slot when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50)
Paper drawer
Load the type of paper you frequently use into the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper
Drawer(P. 47)
Scanning area
Documents loaded in the feeder are automatically fed to the scanning area for scanning.
Platen glass
Place documents to scan on the platen glass. Also, use the platen glass to place thick or bound documents
such as books when they cannot be loaded in the feeder. Placing Documents(P. 41)
Ventilation slots (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in
front of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation. Installation(P. 3)
Basic Operations
19
Back Side
1469-009
MF249dw / MF247dw
MF236n
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. When a
Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 586)
Rear cover
Open the rear cover when clearing paper jams. Clearing Jams(P. 541)
USB port
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer. For connection steps, see "Getting
Started". Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. For connection steps, see
"Getting Started". Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
Basic Operations
20
External telephone jack
Connect your telephone or answering machine. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 112)
Telephone line jack
Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line. Connecting the Telephone
Line(P. 112)
Power socket
Connect the power cord. For connection steps, see "Getting Started". Manuals Included with the
Machine(P. 659)
Basic Operations
21
Interior
1469-00A
Operation panel
Lift this panel to replace the toner cartridges or clear paper jams. How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 603) Clearing Jams(P. 541)
Toner cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridges or clear paper jams. How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 603) Clearing Jams(P. 541)
Paper exit guide
Open this guide to clear paper jams. Clearing Jams(P. 541)
LINKS
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
Basic Operations
22
Manual Feed Slot
1469-00C
Manual feed cover
Open this slot to load paper in the manual feed slot.
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50)
Basic Operations
23
Paper Drawer
1469-00E
Dust cover
Open this cover to load paper in the paper drawer.
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47)
Basic Operations
24
Operation Panel
1469-00F
[Home] key
Press to display the <Home> Screen. Customizing the <Home> Screen(P. 33)
Display
You can view the progress of copy, fax, and other jobs and error statuses. The display is a touch panel,
allowing you to operate the screen by touch to specify settings. Display(P. 28) Using the
Display(P. 35)
[Reset] key
Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specied settings.
[Clear] key
Press to delete the entered numbers and text.
Basic Operations
25
[Back] key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
[Status Monitor] key
Press to check the status of printing or faxing, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such
as the IP address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the paper size and
the amount remaining in the toner cartridges, or whether any errors occurred. Display(P. 28)
Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)
Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 38)
[Stop] key
Press to cancel copying, faxing, and other operations.
[Energy Saver] key
Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press
the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 76)
[Quiet Mode] key
Press to put the machine into quiet mode. While in quiet mode this key is lit in green. Press the key again to
exit quiet mode. Entering Quiet Mode(P. 74)
[Error] indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
Wi-Fi indicator (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Lights up when the machine is connected to wireless LAN.
[Processing/Data] indicator
Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there are
documents waiting to be processed.
[Start] key
Press to scan or copy documents.
[#] key
Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".
[*] key
●Press to switch the type of text that is entered.
●Press to use tone dialing such as when receiving fax information services. Receiving Fax Information
Services(P. 161)
Basic Operations
26
LINKS
Using the Display(P. 35)
Basic Operations
27
Display
1469-00H
The <Home> Screen for initiating operations and screens for specifying settings appear in the display. You can also
view job progress and messages here. Touch the display to operate it.
<Home> Screen
The <Home> Screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing on the operation panel. Use
this screen to specify settings for and register functions.
Toggle functions
Switch to copy, fax, or scan functions. Copying(P. 79) Faxing(P. 103) Using the Machine as a
Scanner(P. 232)
<Addr. Book>
Use this to register or edit the destinations for e-mails and faxes. You can also display a registered
destination when sending an e-mail or fax. Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other machine settings start from this button. Setting Menu
List(P. 472)
<Paper Set.>
Select the paper for printing. This button is also used for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in the
paper drawer and manual feed slot. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
<Home Set.>
Allows you to change the order that <Home> Screen buttons are displayed in. Customizing the <Home>
Screen(P. 33)
Basic Operations
28
<Paper Save>
Settings are preregistered for economically copying 2 pages (or 4 pages) reduced on a single sheet. Using
the <Paper Save> Button(P. 96)
<Scan -> PC1> / <Scan -> PC2>
By registering scan settings beforehand, you can simply tap this button to start a scan. Scanning Using
the <Scan -> PC> Button(P. 237)
<ID Card Cpy>
Settings are preregistered for copying the front and back sides of a driver's license or other ID card onto the
same side of a page at actual size. Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page(P. 98)
<Direct Conn> (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Use this to establish a direct wireless connection to a mobile device. Make Direct Connection (Access
Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 291)
<One-Touch 1> to <One-Touch 4>
If you register destinations beforehand as One-Touch Dial numbers, they can be quickly displayed.
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 127)
<Coded Dial>
If you register destinations beforehand as coded dial numbers, they can be quickly displayed by simply
entering a three-digit number. Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
<Status Monitor> Screen
When you press , a screen is displayed that enables you to check the status of documents that are being
printed, sent, or received, as well as the status of the machine (amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc.)
and the network setting information such as the IP address of the machine.
Basic Operations
29
<Error Information/Notication>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred. When an Error Message Appears(P. 549)
<Device Information>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the paper size or the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
<Paper Information>
Displays the paper size specied in each paper source.
<Cartridge Level>
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their
lifetime before the toner runs out.
<Check Counter>
Displays the totals for printouts. Viewing the Counter Value(P. 621)
Status of copy/print/send/receive jobs
Displays the current status of the selected item. The <Copy Job Status> screen is shown below as an example.
Basic Operations
30
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
When a Message Is Displayed
Messages are displayed at the top of the screen in situations such as when end of toner cartridge lifetime is
reached or when a cover is left open. The display alternates between showing the normal screen and the
message.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 549)
When <You have notications.> or <Tap Icon on Right ->> Is Displayed
Tap to view the notication.
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-
screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example ( When an Error Message Appears(P. 549) ).
LINKS
Customizing the <Home> Screen(P. 33)
Basic Operations
31
Using the Display(P. 35)
Basic Operations
32
Customizing the <Home> Screen
1469-00J
You can change the order that buttons in the <Home> screen are displayed in according to your application or a
preferred arrangement.
◼Changing the Home Screen Button Display Order
1Press and tap <Home Set.>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
2Tap <Set Display Order>.
3Tap the button to move.
4Tap <Previous> or <Next> to move the button, and tap <Apply>.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to move all buttons you want to move.
6Tap <End>.
Basic Operations
33
◼To Insert Blanks in <Home> Screen
1Press and tap <Home Set.>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
2Tap <Insert and Delete Blank>.
3Tap the button where you want to insert a blank, and tap <Insert>.
●To delete an inserted blank, select the blank, tap <Delete>, and proceed to step 5.
4Tap <Apply>.
5Tap <End>.
LINKS
Display(P. 28)
Basic Operations
34
Using the Display
1469-00K
The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.
Avoid the following actions.
The display may misfunction or be damaged.
●Pressing forcefully
●Pressing with pointed objects (ngernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)
●Operating with wet/soiled hands
●Operating the display while an object is placed on it
Tap
Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or nalizing items.
Long Touch
Keep nger held on the screen. When text cannot be completely displayed on one line ("..." appears), touch and
hold the line to scroll all of the text. Also continuously increases/decreases the copy magnication.
◼Selecting items
Tap an item name or button to make a selection.
Basic Operations
35
If an item is mistakenly touched
Slide your nger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.
To return to the previous screen
Press to return to the previous screen.
◼Scrolling the screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is
displayed, tap / to scroll the screen. The screen changes page by page, and the page number is
displayed in the scroll bar.
◼Changing values and settings
Changing values
Tap / to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can enter
values directly using the numeric keys.
Basic Operations
36
To move the cursor
When / is displayed, tap to move the cursor.
Changing setting values
To adjust a value on a scale, tap <-> / <+>.
●You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the scrolling speed or display language:
Display Settings(P. 485)
●To change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied length of
time:
Function After Auto Reset(P. 492)
Basic Operations
37
Entering Text
1469-00L
Use the display and numeric keys to enter text and values.
Switching the Type of Text
Tap <A/a/12> to switch the type of text that is entered. The currently selected type of text is indicated by the "A",
"a", or "12" displayed above and to the right of the text input eld.
You can also press to switch the type of text.
Types of Text That Can Be Entered
Enter text with the numeric keys and the display. Text that can be entered is listed below.
Key A a 12
@ . - _ / 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
Basic Operations
38
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
(space) - . * # ! " , ; : ^ ` _ = / | ' ? $ @ % & + \ ~ ( ) [ ] { } < > (Not available)
Press or tap <#> when the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a> to display enterable symbols in
the screen. Tap symbols to enter.
Deleting Text
One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Tap or to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap .
Example of Entering Text and Numbers
Example: "Canon-1"
1Tap <A/a/12> (or press ) repeatedly until <A> is selected.
2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.
3Tap <A/a/12> (or press ) repeatedly until <a> is selected.
4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.
5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.
7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.
8Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.
9Tap <A/a/12> (or press ) repeatedly until <12> is selected.
Basic Operations
39
10 Press .
11 Tap <Apply>.
Basic Operations
40
Placing Documents
1469-00R
Place documents on the platen glass or in the feeder. Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound documents
such as books. You can load two or more sheets of documents in the feeder so that they can be scanned continuously.
For information about the types of documents that can be placed on the platen glass or in the feeder, and information
about the scannable area of a document, see Document Type(P. 647) or Scan Area(P. 648) .
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass(P. 41)
Placing Documents in the Feeder(P. 42)
Use documents that are completely dry
When placing documents, make sure that any glue, ink, or correction uid on the documents has completely
dried.
To avoid paper jams
Do not place the following types of documents in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:
●Wrinkled or creased paper
●Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
●Curled or rolled paper
●Coated paper
●Torn paper
●Onion skin or thin paper
●Stapled or clipped documents
●Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
●Transparencies
To scan documents more accurately
Documents placed in the feeder are scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, documents
placed on the platen glass remain in a xed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate scanning
results, placing documents on the platen glass is recommended.
To scan tracing paper or transparencies
To scan transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass
1Open the feeder.
Basic Operations
41
2Place the document face down on the platen glass.
●Align the corner of the document with the top-left corner of the platen glass.
To scan transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white
paper.
3Gently close the feeder.
●The machine is ready to scan the document.
●When scanning is complete, remove the document from the platen glass.
Placing Documents in the Feeder
1Open the document feeder tray.
Basic Operations
42
2Spread the document guides apart.
●Slide the document guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual document width.
3Fan the document stack and align the edges.
●Fan the document stack in small batches, and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a at surface a
few times.
4Place the document(s) face up in the feeder.
●Make sure that the document stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ).
●Do not load documents of various sizes at the same time.
●Up to 50 sheets* can be loaded at a time. If 50 or more sheets are loaded, scanning may stop or a paper
jam may occur.
*For MF247dw / MF236n, up to 35 sheets.
5Align the document guides against the edges of the document.
●Slide the document guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the document.
Basic Operations
43
●The machine is ready to scan the document.
Align the document guides securely against the edges of the document
Document guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jam.
While documents are being scanned
Do not add or remove documents.
When scanning is complete
Remove the scanned documents from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.
Basic Operations
44
Loading Paper
1469-00S
You can load the paper into the paper drawer or manual feed slot. Load the paper you usually use into the paper
drawer. The paper drawer is convenient when using large amounts of paper. Use the manual feed slot when you
temporarily use size or type of paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer. See Paper(P. 649) for available paper
sizes.
Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
See the table below to specify the paper settings according to the type and weight of the paper to load into the
paper source. For more information about how to specify the paper settings on the machine, see Specifying
Paper Size and Type(P. 56) . For the amount of paper that can be loaded in each paper source, see
Paper(P. 649) .
Paper Type Paper Weight Paper Setting
on the Machine
Plain paper 16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²)
<Plain (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>
<Plain L (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>*
Recycled paper 16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²) <Recycled (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>
Color paper 16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²) <Color (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>
Heavy paper
24 to 32 lb Bond (90 to 120 g/m²) <Heavy 1 (24 lb Bond-32 lb Bond)>
33 to 60 lb Cover (121 to 163 g/m²) <Heavy 2 (33 lb Bond-60 lb Cover)>
Bond paper
16 to 24 lb Bond (60 to 90 g/m²) <Bond 1 (16 lb Bond-24 lb Bond)>
25 to 32 lb Bond (91 to 120 g/m²) <Bond 2 (25 lb Bond-32 lb Bond)>
33 to 60 lb Cover (121 to 163 g/m²) <Bond 3 (33 lb Bond-60 lb Cover)>
Envelope <Envelope>
Label <Labels>
Index card <Index Card>
* If set to <Plain (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)> and that printout is curled, specify <Plain L (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)> and print again.
Do not use the following types of paper:
●Wrinkled or creased paper
●Curled or rolled paper
●Torn paper
●Damp paper
Basic Operations
45
●Very thin paper
●Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
●Highly textured paper
●Glossy paper
Paper handling and storage
●Store the paper on a at surface.
●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
●Do not store the paper vertically or stack too much paper.
●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic
changes in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form on the back side of the
operation panel or around the paper output area. There is nothing unusual about any of these
occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing toner on the paper causes moisture in the
paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room temperatures).
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 58)
Basic Operations
46
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer
1469-00U
Load the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the
paper drawer, load the paper in the manual feed slot. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50)
Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation.
1Lift the dust cover.
2Slide the paper guides apart.
Size abbreviations on the paper guides
The abbreviations on the paper guides in the paper drawer indicate paper sizes as follows:
●LGL: Legal
●LTR: Letter
●STMT: Statement
Basic Operations
47
●EXEC: Executive
3Insert the paper into the paper drawer until the paper stops.
●Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up.
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.
●Fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.
●When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen is
displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 486)
Do not exceed the load limit guide when loading paper
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guide ( ). Loading too much paper can cause
paper jams.
When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 52) or Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 54) .
4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Move the paper guides in so they are exactly the width of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
Basic Operations
48
5Lower the dust cover.
When Legal size paper is loaded
The paper guides at the rear edge of the paper will be extended. Open the dust cover extension, then lower
the dust cover.
6Pull out the paper stopper to open.
»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
When changing the paper size or type
The factory default settings for paper size and type are <LTR> and <Plain (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>,
respectively. If you load a different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings.
If you do not change the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
manual feed slot ( Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50) ), with the side to print face up (previously
printed side face down).
●Load one sheet at a time per each print.
●You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
●You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
●If you are using A5 paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Paper(P. 649)
Basic Operations
49
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
1469-00W
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the paper drawer, load the paper in the manual feed slot. Load
the paper that you usually use in the paper drawer. Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47)
Make sure to load paper in portrait orientation
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation. Make sure to load the paper in portrait orientation.
1Open the manual feed cover.
2Spread the paper guides apart.
●Slide the paper guides outward.
3Insert the paper into the manual feed slot until the paper stops.
●Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine), with the print side face up.
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.
●When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen is
displayed. Notify to Check Paper Settings(P. 486)
Basic Operations
50
When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 52) or Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 54) .
4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
●Slide the paper guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5Pull out the paper stopper to open.
Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
Basic Operations
51
Loading Envelopes
1469-00X
Make sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 52)
Loaded Orientation(P. 53)
This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you need
to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading envelopes in the
paper drawer or manual feed slot, see Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47) or Loading Paper in
the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
Only one envelope at a time can be loaded in the manual feed slot. Follow steps 1 to 4 in the procedure below
to prepare the envelope for loading.
1Close the ap of each envelope.
2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.
Basic Operations
52
4Align the edges of the envelope on a at surface.
Loaded Orientation
Load the envelopes in portrait orientation, short edge rst, with the non-glued side (front side) face up.
Load envelopes in the same orientation for both the paper drawer and manual feed slot.
Load the envelopes so that their aps are at the left.
Basic Operations
53
Loading Preprinted Paper
1469-00Y
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 54)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 55)
This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the paper drawer or manual feed slot, see Loading
Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47) or Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50) .
Making 1-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Load only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot each time you print.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
Basic Operations
54
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting (MF249dw / MF247dw)
When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time you perform
1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>, the facing
that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face down) can also be used for 1-sided
printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. Switch
Paper Feed Method(P. 493)
Basic Operations
55
Specifying Paper Size and Type
1469-010
You must specify the paper size and type settings to match the paper that is loaded. Make sure to change the paper
settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously loaded paper.
If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
1Press and tap <Paper Set.>.
2Tap <MP Tray> or <Drawer 1>.
3Select the loaded paper size.
●If the loaded paper size is not displayed, tap <Other Sizes>.
4Select the loaded paper type.
Basic Operations
56
When a frequently used paper size is known
You can set the machine to display only frequently used paper sizes in the selection screen.
1Tap <Paper Set.>.
2Tap <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
3Tap <Multi-Purpose Tray> or <Drawer 1>.
4Select and checkmark a frequently used paper size.
Uncheckmarked paper sizes are displayed in the <Paper Size (Other Sz.)> screen.
5Tap <Apply>.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47)
Paper(P. 649)
Basic Operations
57
Registering a Custom Paper Size
1469-011
You can register one frequently used custom paper size each for the paper drawer and manual feed slot.
1Press and tap <Paper Set.>.
2Tap <MP Tray> or <Drawer 1>.
3Tap <Custom>.
4Specify the paper size.
1Specify the length of the <X> (shorter) side.
●Tap <X>.
●Input the length of the <X> side using / , with / to move the cursor between the digits
for inputting whole numbers and fractions, and tap <Apply>.
2Specify the length of the <Y> (longer) side.
●Tap <Y>.
●Input the length of the <Y> side, and tap <Apply>.
Basic Operations
58
3Tap <Apply>.
5Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47)
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50)
Basic Operations
59
Registering in the Address Book
1469-012
You can register frequently used fax/scan destinations in the Address Book and
easily select them when needed. You can register up to 104 destinations in the
Address Book. Destinations can be searched alphabetically, from lists in the Address
Book, or by entering three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) ( Registering
Destinations in the Address Book(P. 61) ). You can also specify destinations more
quickly by using the following features.
◼One-Touch Dial
Registering a lot of addresses in the Address Book makes it dicult to nd the destination you need. To avoid this
situation, register frequently used destinations as One-Touch Dial numbers. This allows them to be displayed by the
One-Touch buttons in the <Home> Screen. You can register up to 4 destinations for One-Touch Dial. Registering
Destinations for One-Touch Dial(P. 65)
◼Group Dial
You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. You can
send faxes or e-mails to multiple destinations at the same time. You can register up to 50 destinations for a group.
Groups can also be registered in One-Touch Dial. Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial(P. 69)
●Use the computer to register a shared folder as the destination for scans.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 368)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
●You can save the Address Book as a le on your computer (although you cannot use the computer to edit
the Address Book). You can also import a saved Address Book from the computer to the machine. Saving/
Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 463)
●You can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book.
Address Book List(P. 618)
●Destinations for scans (e-mail addresses and shared folders) can be registered on the MF249dw / MF247dw
only.
Basic Operations
60
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
1469-013
You can register up to 100 destinations for Coded Dial in the Address Book. You can edit or delete destinations that
you have registered.
●E-mail addresses can be registered as destinations on the MF249dw / MF247dw only.
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Tap <Regist Dest.>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
3Select <Coded Dial> Select type of address to register.
●According to the address being registered, tap <Fax>/<E-Mail>.
4Tap <Name>.
●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
5Enter the name using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
6Tap <Fax Number> or <E-Mail Address>.
7Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Basic Operations
61
Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)
After tapping <Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.
<ECM TX>
If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper
image from being sent when setting <On>.
<TX Speed>
If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust
the transmission start speed downward incrementally starting from "33600 bps".
<Long Distance>
Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering
overseas fax numbers.
You can also make detailed settings for destinations from <Menu> <Fax Settings>. However, settings
made from <Addr. Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address
Book.
8Tap <Apply>.
●A three-digit number is automatically set to destinations. The number can be edited after it has been
registered.
◼Editing the Content of Registered Destinations
After registering destinations, you can change the content of registered information. For example, you can change the
fax number or name of a registered destination, change the type from fax number to e-mail, change the coded dial
number, and so on.
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
Basic Operations
62
2Tap <Details/Edit>.
3Use / to select the tab containing the destination you want to edit, and tap the
destination.
4Tap <Edit>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
5Select the item you want to edit, perform editing, and then tap <Apply>.
6Tap <Apply>.
◼Deleting a Registered Destination
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Tap <Details/Edit>.
3Use / to select the tab containing the destination you want to delete, and tap
the destination.
Basic Operations
63
4Tap <Delete>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
5Tap <Yes>.
Basic Operations
64
Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial
1469-014
You can conveniently register frequently used destinations for One-Touch Dial. Destinations can be quickly displayed
by tapping One-Touch buttons in the <Home> Screen. You can edit or delete destinations that you have registered. You
can register up to 4 destinations for One-Touch Dial.
●E-mail addresses can be registered as destinations on the MF249dw / MF247dw only.
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Tap <Regist Dest.>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
3Select <One-Touch> Select type of address to register.
●According to the address being registered, tap <Fax>/<E-Mail>.
4Tap the number to register.
●You can change this number to another number later.
5Tap <Name>.
●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
6Enter the name using the numeric keys and tap <Apply>.
7Tap <Fax Number> or <E-Mail Address>.
Basic Operations
65
8Enter the destination using the numeric keys and tap <Apply>.
Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)
After tapping <Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.
<ECM TX>
If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper
image from being sent when setting <On>.
<TX Speed>
If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust
the transmission start speed downward incrementally starting from "33600 bps".
<Long Distance>
Specify <International (1) > to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering
overseas fax numbers.
You can also make detailed settings for destinations from <Menu> <Fax Settings>. However, settings
made from <Addr. Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address
Book.
9Tap <Apply>.
◼Editing the Content of Registered Destinations in One-Touch Dial
After registering destinations, you can change the content of registered information. For example, you can change the
fax number or name of a registered destination, change the type from fax number to e-mail, change the numbers
registered to One-Touch Dial, and so on.
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
Basic Operations
66
2Tap <Details/Edit>.
3Select < > using / , and tap the destination you want to change.
4Tap <Edit>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
5Tap the item you want to edit, perform editing, and then tap <Apply>.
6Tap <Apply>.
◼Deleting a Registered Destination
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Tap <Details/Edit>.
3Select < > using / , and tap the destination you want to delete.
4Tap <Delete>.
Basic Operations
67
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
5Tap <Yes>.
Basic Operations
68
Registering Multiple Destinations for Group Dial
1469-015
Multiple destinations can be combined into groups. After a group is registered, you can add or delete destinations.
●Only destinations of the same type of address can be registered in the same group.
●Shared folders cannot be registered in a group as destinations.
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Tap <Regist Dest.>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
3Tap <Coded Dial>.
●Groups can also be registered in One-Touch Dial. Select <One-Touch> to register the group as a One-Touch
Dial number.
4Tap <Group>.
5Tap <Name>.
●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.
6Enter the name using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
7Tap <Number of Destinations>.
8Tap <Add>.
Basic Operations
69
9Use / to select the tab and tap a destination you want to register.
10 Tap <Add>.
11 Repeat steps 8 and 9 until you have registered all of the destinations that you want
to register, and then tap <Apply>.
12 Tap <Apply>.
◼Editing the Content of Registered Groups
After registering destinations, you can change the content of groups such as names, destinations, and coded dial
numbers.
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
Basic Operations
70
2Tap <Details/Edit>.
3Select < > using / , and tap the destination you want to change.
4Tap <Edit>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
5Select the item you want to edit, perform editing, and then tap <Apply>.
6Tap <Apply>.
◼Deleting a Group
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Tap <Details/Edit>.
3Select < > using / , and tap the group you want to delete.
4Tap <Delete>.
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
5Tap <Yes>.
Basic Operations
71
Adjusting the Volume
1469-016
The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when fax sending is complete or when a paper jam or
error occurs. You can set the volume of each of these sounds individually.
1Press and tap <Menu>.
2Tap <Preferences>.
3Tap <Volume Settings>.
4Select a setting.
Setting Description Procedure
<Fax Tone> Sound produced during a fax transmission
●Go to step 5.
<Ring Tone> Sound produced when an incoming fax is
received
<TX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax sending is complete
●Go to step 5.
<RX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax receiving is
complete
<Scanning Done Tone> Sound produced when fax document scanning
is complete
<Entry Tone>
Conrmation sound each time a key on the
operation panel or button on the display is
pressed
●Select <On> (produce a tone) or
<Off> (not produce a tone).
<Invalid Entry Tone>
Sound produced when an invalid key
operation is performed, such as when you
enter a number outside the valid setting range
<Warning Tone> Sound produced when a paper jam or other
error occurs
<Job Done Tone> Sound produced when an operation such as
copying or scanning is complete
<Energy Saver Alert> Sound produced when the machine enters or
exits sleep mode
Basic Operations
72
<Original in Feeder Detection Tone> Sound produced when an original is loaded in
the feeder
5Use / to set volume, tap <Apply>.
●Tap and move the cursor all the way to the left to mute the sound.
End sound only for error
●Tap <When Error> <On> <Apply>.
Basic Operations
73
Entering Quiet Mode
1469-017
The quiet mode function reduces the operation sound of the machine. For example, when using the machine at night,
press on the operation panel. With only this operation, you can easily minimize operation sound. You can also
specify a time for the machine to automatically enter quiet mode.
When in quiet mode
When the machine enters quiet mode, lights up green.
When quiet mode is enabled
●The operation of functions becomes slower.
●The volume of notications such as <Entry Tone> and <Job Done Tone> is not lower. To adjust volume or
mute sounds, see Adjusting the Volume(P. 72) .
When the machine cannot enter quiet mode
●The machine is in Special Printing Mode
●A particular paper size or paper type is specied
Specifying a time for the machine to enter quiet mode
You can specify a time for the machine to enter or exit quiet mode automatically. For example, this is useful
when wanting to reduce operation noise only for late-night operation.
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Quiet Mode Time> Specify each setting <Apply>
Basic Operations
74
<Start Time>
Specify a time for entering quiet mode. To set, tap <On> then specify the time.
<End Time>
Specify a time for exiting quiet mode. To set, tap <On> then specify the time.
Exiting Quiet Mode
Press to exit quiet mode.
Basic Operations
75
Entering Sleep Mode
1469-018
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the
operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can
save power simply by pressing on the operation panel. You can also use the Auto Sleep Time setting to
automatically put the machine into sleep mode if it remains idle for a specied length of time.
When in sleep mode
When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up green.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
●When the machine is in operation
●When the [Processing/Data] indicator is lit up or blinking
●When documents are placed in the feeder
●When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
●When a paper jam occurs
●When the receiver of the external telephone is off the hook
●When the menu screen is displayed
●When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when error messages are displayed.)
●When the machine is waiting for a wireless LAN connection or Direct Connection
When You Want to Set the Auto Sleep Timer
The factory default settings for the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode are
listed below. We recommend using the factory default settings to save the most power. If you want to change
the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters auto sleep mode, follow the procedure below.
●1 minute (setting range is 1 to 30 minutes)
Basic Operations
76
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that elapses before the
machine automatically enters sleep mode <Apply>
Exiting Sleep Mode
Press . You can also tap the display or press any key other than to exit sleep mode.
If an external telephone is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when you take the receiver off the
hook.
Basic Operations
77
Copying
Copying .................................................................................................................................................................. 79
Basic Copy Operations ........................................................................................................................................ 81
Canceling Copies ................................................................................................................................................. 83
Various Copy Settings ......................................................................................................................................... 85
Enlarging or Reducing .................................................................................................................................... 86
Selecting Document Type ............................................................................................................................... 87
Adjusting Density ........................................................................................................................................... 88
Adjusting Sharpness ....................................................................................................................................... 89
2-Sided Copying (MF249dw / MF247dw) ......................................................................................................... 91
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1) ......................................................................... 94
Using the <Paper Save> Button ...................................................................................................................... 96
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page ........................................................................................... 98
Collating Copies by Page ................................................................................................................................ 99
Changing Default Settings ............................................................................................................................ 100
Copying
78
Copying
1469-019
This chapter describes basic copy operations and various other useful functions, such as 2-sided copying and copying
both sides of an ID card onto one page.
◼Using Basic Operations
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Canceling Copies(P. 83)
◼Using Copy Settings to Suit Your Needs
Enlarging or Reducing(P. 86) Collating Copies by Page(P. 99) Selecting Document Type(P. 87)
Adjusting Density(P. 88) Adjusting Sharpness(P. 89) 2-Sided Copying (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 91)
Copying
79
Copying Multiple Documents
onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
(P. 94)
Using the <Paper Save>
Button(P. 96)
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card
onto One Page(P. 98)
◼Simplifying Your Frequent Copy Operations
Changing Default Settings(P. 100)
Copying
80
Basic Copy Operations
1469-01A
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Copy>.
3Enter the number of copies using the numeric keys.
●Enter a quantity from 1 to 999.
●Press to cancel the entered quantity.
4Specify the copy settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Copy Settings(P. 85)
5Press .
Copying
81
●Copying starts.
●If you want to cancel copying, tap <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Copies(P. 83)
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
The document is automatically scanned.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
Depending on the copy settings you made, the screen for selecting the document size is displayed when
copying multiple documents. Follow the procedure below.
1Select the document size.
2Place the next document on the platen glass, and press .
●Repeat this step until you nish scanning the entire document.
3Tap <Start Copy>.
●When the <Size/Settings Mismatch> message appears.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 549)
When copying documents with text or images that extend to the edges of the page
The edges of the document might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Scan
Area(P. 648) .
●If you always want to make copies with the same settings:
Changing Default Settings(P. 100)
Copying
82
Canceling Copies
1469-01C
If you want to cancel copying immediately after pressing , tap <Cancel> on the screen or press on the
operation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.
◼Tap <Cancel> on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying
◼Press to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select the copy document to cancel.
◼Use to Cancel
<Copy Job Status> <Cancel> <Yes>
Copying
83
Copy details
The number of copies, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the details without
canceling copying, press to return to the copy main screen.
<Cancel>
Cancels copying.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Copying
84
Various Copy Settings
1469-01E
A variety of settings are available to suit your needs, such as when you want to save paper or make your documents
easier to read.
Enlarging or Reducing(P. 86) Selecting Document Type(P. 87) Adjusting Density(P. 88)
Adjusting Sharpness(P. 89) 2-Sided Copying (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 91)
Copying Multiple Documents
onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)
(P. 94)
Using the <Paper Save>
Button(P. 96)
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card
onto One Page(P. 98)
Collating Copies by Page(P. 99)
Copying
85
Enlarging or Reducing
1469-01F
You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <STMT->LTR>,
or by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1%.
<Copy> <Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio
<Custom Ratio>
Use / or the numeric keys to enter the copy ratio, and tap <Apply>. You can set any copy ratio from
25% to 400% in 1% increments.
Preset copy ratio
Select a copy ratio.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Copying
86
Selecting Document Type
1469-01H
You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the document
type, such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine
photos.
<Copy> <Original Type> Select the document type
<Text>
Suitable when copying documents that only contain text.
<Text/Photo (High Speed)>
Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos. Priority is given to speed over image
quality.
<Text/Photo>
Suitable when copying documents that contain both text and photos.
<Photo>
Suitable when copying documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.
If <Text/Photo (High Speed)>, <Text/Photo>, or <Photo> is selected and <Density> is set to <Auto Density>, it
changes to Manual Density.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Copying
87
Adjusting Density
1469-01J
You can adjust the density of the copy if the text or images in a document are too
light or dark. You can also automatically set an optimal density for a document.
<Copy> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
<->
Decreases the density.
<+>
Increases the density.
<Auto Density>
An optimal density for the document is automatically set.
<Original Type> is automatically set to <Text>. ( Selecting Document Type(P. 87) )
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Adjusting Sharpness(P. 89)
Correct Density(P. 496)
Copying
88
Adjusting Sharpness
1469-01K
You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen
blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of
magazine photos.
<Copy> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
<->
Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
<+>
Increases the image sharpness.
Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
Copying
89
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Adjusting Density(P. 88)
Copying
90
2-Sided Copying
1469-01L
You can copy two pages of a document on both sides of the paper. You can also copy
a two-sided document on both sides of the paper, or on two separate pages.
●<2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper.
Paper(P. 649)
●<2-Sided> is not available when using <Paper Save> or <ID Card Copy>.
Using the <Paper Save> enables you to combine 2-sided copying and <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>: Using the <Paper
Save> Button(P. 96)
<Copy> <2-Sided> Select the type of 2-sided copying
Types of 2-sided copying
The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying.
1-Sided->2-Sided 2-Sided->2-Sided 2-Sided->1-Sided
<Original/Finishing Type>
Specify if you want to change the binding, such as when copying book-type documents in calendar-type
format.
1-Sided->2-Sided
●If you want to copy portrait-oriented documents in calendar-type format (short-edge binding)
Copying
91
<Original/Finishing Type> <1->2-Sided> <Portrait> <Calendar Type>
●If you want to copy landscape-oriented documents in book-type format (short-edge binding)
<Original/Finishing Type> <1->2-Sided> <Landscape> <Book Type>
2-Sided->2-Sided (MF249dw)
●If you want to create copies with a different binding type than the original
<Original/Finishing Type> <2->2-Sided> Select the original orientation Select the original
binding type Select the binding type for the nished copy, which is different from that of the
original document
2-Sided->1-Sided (MF249dw)
This setting enables you to align the direction of the output paper.
●When a 2-sided document is in portrait-oriented calendar-type format (short-edge binding)
<Original/Finishing Type> <2->1-Sided> <Portrait> <Calendar Type>
●When a 2-sided document is in landscape-oriented book-type format (short-edge binding)
Copying
92
<Original/Finishing Type> <2->1-Sided> <Landscape> <Book Type>
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 94)
Using the <Paper Save> Button(P. 96)
Copying
93
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4
on 1)
1469-01R
You can copy two or four documents onto a single sheet at a reduced size. This
decreases the number of pages, enabling you to save paper.
●Using <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). You
can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the document might not
be copied if you increase it.
●<2 on 1>/<4 on 1> is not available when using <Paper Save> or <ID Card Copy>.
●When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.
Using the <Paper Save> enables you to combine 2-sided copying and <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>: Using the <Paper
Save> Button(P. 96)
<Copy> <N on 1> Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> Select the document size on the <Scan Size>
screen
<2 on 1>/<4 on 1>
Select <2 on 1> to copy two pages of documents onto a single sheet, or select <4 on 1> to copy four pages of
documents onto a single sheet.
<Select Layout>
Specify how to arrange the documents on the page.
Copying
94
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
2-Sided Copying (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 91)
Using the <Paper Save> Button(P. 96)
Copying
95
Using the <Paper Save> Button
1469-01S
You can use <2 on 1>/<4 on 1> to copy multiple documents onto a single sheet, and
<2-Sided> to copy the document onto both sides of a page. Using <Paper Save> in
the Home Screen, which combines these functions, makes it easier to save paper
than when using the functions separately.
●The 2-sided <Paper Save Copy> settings may not be available with some sizes and types of paper.
Paper(P. 649)
●Using <Paper Save> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). You can
increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the document might not be
copied if you increase it.
●<Paper Save> is not available when using <2-Sided>, <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>, or <ID Card Copy>.
●When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.
<Paper Save> Select the paper save copy setting Select the document size on the <Scan Size>
screen
Paper save copy settings
Select one of four setting combinations.
Original (Portrait) Copy
<2 on 1 1->2-Sided>*
<4 on 1 1->2-Sided>*
Copying
96
<2 on 1 1->1-Sided>
<4 on 1 1->1-Sided>
* MF249dw / MF247dw Only
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
2-Sided Copying (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 91)
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 94)
Copying
97
Copying Both Sides of an ID Card onto One Page
1469-01U
You can use <ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto the same side of
a page. This function is useful when copying a driver's license or ID card.
●All regular paper sizes can be used except Letter (Government), Legal (Government), and Envelope.
●<Copy Ratio> is automatically set to <Copy Ratio: 100% (Direct)>.
●<ID Card Copy> is not available when using <Paper Save>, <2-Sided>, or <2 on 1>/<4 on 1>.
Place the card <ID Card Copy> Turn the card over
How to place the card
●When the <Size/Settings Mismatch> message appears.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 549)
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Copying
98
Collating Copies by Page
1469-01W
When preparing multiple copies of multi-page documents, set <Collate> to <On> to
collate copies in sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts
for meetings or presentations.
<Copy> <Collate> <On>
<Off>
The copies are grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a ve-page
document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
<On>
The copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three
copies of a ve-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Copying
99
Changing Default Settings
1469-01X
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If
you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to
congure the same settings every time you make copies.
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the default
value of the selected item <Apply> <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Basic Copy Operations(P. 81)
Various Copy Settings(P. 85)
Copy Settings(P. 495)
Copying
100
Faxing
Faxing ................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ................................................................................................ 106
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use ..................................................................................................... 107
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name ................................................................................................ 108
Selecting the Receive Mode .......................................................................................................................... 110
Connecting the Telephone Line .................................................................................................................... 112
Sending Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 114
Sending from Registered Destinations ......................................................................................................... 120
Specifying from Address Book ............................................................................................................... 121
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers .......................................................... 124
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons ............................................................................ 127
Specifying Previously Used Destinations ................................................................................................ 130
Various Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 133
Adjusting Resolution .............................................................................................................................. 134
Adjusting Density ................................................................................................................................... 135
Adjusting Sharpness .............................................................................................................................. 136
Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF249dw) .............................................................................................. 138
Changing Default Settings ............................................................................................................................ 139
Canceling Sending Faxes .............................................................................................................................. 140
Receiving Faxes ................................................................................................................................................. 142
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes ............................................................................. 146
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending) ................................................................................. 147
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast) ........................................... 148
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception) ........................................................................... 150
Forwarding Received Faxes .......................................................................................................................... 154
Selecting a Document to Forward .......................................................................................................... 155
Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically (MF249dw / MF247dw) ..................................... 157
Receiving Fax Information Services .............................................................................................................. 161
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents ......................................................................... 163
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software .......................................................... 165
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .................................................................................................. 167
Sending PC Faxes ......................................................................................................................................... 168
Attaching Cover Sheets to PC Faxes .............................................................................................................. 171
Using Address Book for PC Faxes ................................................................................................................. 175
Registering Destinations ........................................................................................................................ 178
Faxing
101
Using Registered Destinations ............................................................................................................... 182
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data from the Fax Driver ............................................................... 184
Faxing
102
Faxing
1469-01Y
This chapter describes fax settings, basic fax operations and various other useful functions to suit your needs, such as
PC Fax to send documents directly from computers, Address Book to specify destinations easily, and Forwarding to
receive faxes even when you are out of the oce.
●You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Conguring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions(P. 106)
●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the
Address Book(P. 60)
◼Specifying Fax Settings
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 106)
◼Using Basic Operations
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 140)
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
◼Specifying Scanning Settings
Adjusting Resolution(P. 134) Adjusting Density(P. 135) Adjusting Sharpness(P. 136)
Faxing
103
Scanning 2-Sided Documents
(MF249dw)(P. 138)
◼Specifying Destinations Simply and Quickly
Specifying from Address
Book(P. 121)
Selecting Destinations Directly
by Entering Coded Dial
Numbers(P. 124)
Specifying Destinations with the
One-Touch Buttons(P. 127)
Specifying Previously Used
Destinations(P. 130)
◼Sending and Receiving According to Your Purposes
Making a Call before Sending
Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 147)
Sending Faxes to Multiple
Destinations Simultaneously
(Sequential Broadcast)(P. 148)
Storing Received Faxes into
Memory (Memory Reception)
(P. 150)
Faxing
104
Forwarding Received
Faxes(P. 154)
Receiving Fax Information
Services(P. 161)
◼Sending Faxes Directly from Your Computer
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 167)
Faxing
105
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions
1469-020
Follow steps 1 to 4 described below to congure the fax settings. First, determine which receive mode best suits your
intended use, and then follow the on-screen instructions to congure the settings. For more information about a
particular step, click on the link to go to the corresponding section.
Step 1 Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use(P. 107)
Step 2 Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 108)
Step 3 Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 110)
Step 4 Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 112)
Faxing
106
Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use
1469-021
Before conguring the fax settings, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use.
Intended use Receive mode
Use fax only/Never use telephone <Auto>
This setting is for when you want to use the machine exclusively for receiving faxes,
and you do not want to use the telephone.
Mostly use telephone/Almost never use fax <Manual>
Connect your telephone to the machine. This setting is for when you mostly want to
use the telephone. You can receive incoming faxes manually.
Use both fax and telephone Use answering machine <Answering Machine>
Connect your answering machine. Callers can record a
message if they call while you are away from the telephone.
The machine automatically receives incoming faxes.
Use standard telephone <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
Connect your telephone. The machine automatically receives
incoming faxes, and the telephone rings for incoming calls.
●Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes
properly.
●If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone
company, <DRPD> is also available for the receiving mode.
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
»Continue to Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 108)
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Faxing
107
Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name
1469-022
Register the fax number and unit name of your machine. This information is printed at the top of each page sent from
the machine.
1Press and tap <Menu>.
2Tap <Fax Settings> <Fax Setup Guide>.
3Tap <Set Up Now>.
If you select <Set Up Later>, the receive mode is set to <Auto>.
4Tap <Next>.
Faxing
108
5Enter the fax number using the numeric keys ( Entering Text(P. 38) ), and tap
<Apply>.
6Tap <Next>.
7Enter the unit name (such as a user name or company name) ( Entering
Text(P. 38) ), and tap <Apply>.
●Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters.
●Tapping <A/a/12> toggles the input modes.
»Continue to Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 110)
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Faxing
109
Selecting the Receive Mode
1469-023
Select the receive mode that suits your intended use beforehand ( Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to
Use(P. 107) ).
1Tap <Next>.
●The screen shown here is displayed after the unit name has been registered ( Registering the Fax
Number and Unit Name(P. 108) ).
2Select the receive mode that suits your intended use.
●Select the receive mode with tapping <Yes> or <No>.
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone
company, <DRPD> is also available for the receiving mode. Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
To set the receive mode to <Auto>
To set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
To set the receive mode to <Answering Machine>
To set the receive mode to <Manual>
Faxing
110
3Tap <Apply>.
»Continue to Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 112)
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Faxing
111
Connecting the Telephone Line
1469-024
Connect the telephone line to the machine.
1Tap <Next>.
●One of the screens shown here is displayed after the receive mode has been set ( Selecting the Receive
Mode(P. 110) ).
2Connect the telephone line to the machine.
●Connect the included telephone cable to the telephone line jack on the machine ( ) and the telephone line
jack on the wall.
●If you are using a telephone or answering machine, connect it to the external telephone jack ( ).
If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set up the telephone to receive faxes
manually.
3Tap <Next> after the telephone line has been connected.
4Tap <Yes>.
Faxing
112
If the machine does not automatically set the type of telephone line
Follow the procedure below to set the type of telephone line. If you are not sure of the type of phone line you
are using, contact your local telephone company.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Select Line Type> Select the type of telephone
line
LINKS
Installation(P. 3)
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Faxing
113
Sending Faxes
1469-025
To prevent missending of a fax, always press rst.
* Destinations set by the previous user may remain.
You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Conguring Initial Settings for Fax
Functions(P. 106)
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Fax>.
3Specify a destination.
Specifying destinations using the numeric keys
Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
●If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to
delete all the input characters at once.)
To send overseas
Faxing
114
Enter the international access code, the country code, the area code, and the fax number to specify the
destination.
1Enter the international access code.
2Tap <Pause>.
●<p> (pause) is inserted between numbers. In this case, 012 will be dialed rst, then 2 seconds later,
the next number will be dialed.
●Inputting pauses is optional; however, consecutive numbers that are input without pauses may not be
recognized correctly.
●Pauses can be inserted continuously.
●One pause inserts 2 seconds of waiting time. This time can be changed as necessary. Set Pause
Time(P. 499)
3Enter the country code, the area code, and the fax number.
4Tap <Pause> to insert a pause at the end of the fax number as necessary.
●The waiting time inserted here is xed to 10 seconds. This time cannot be changed.
5Tap <Apply>.
Faxing
115
When <Conrm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>, a screen appears that prompts you to enter the
destination again ( Checking Destinations before Sending Documents(P. 420) ). Enter the same
destination again for conrmation.
Specifying Destinations from Address Book
1Tap <Destination>.
2Tap <Specify from Address Book>.
3Use / to select tab.
<All>
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book. For the marks beside the destinations, see
the explanations below.
<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>
Displays destinations with recipient names whose rst characters correspond to the characters of the
selected tab.
< >
Displays destinations for faxes.
< >
Displays destinations for sending e-mail. Do not use in this procedure.
Specifying from Address Book(P. 121)
< >
Displays destinations for shared folders. Do not use in this procedure.
Specifying from Address Book(P. 121)
< >
Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.
Faxing
116
< >
Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed.
4Select a destination.
Specifying Destinations Entering Coded Dial Numbers Directly
1Tap <Destination>.
2Tap <Specify from Coded Dial>.
3Use the numeric keys to enter a three-digit number (001 to 100).
Specifying Destinations from One-Touch
1Tap <Destination>.
2Tap <Specify from One-Touch>.
Faxing
117
3Select a destination.
4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
5Press to start sending.
●Scanning starts.
●If you want to cancel sending, press Tap <Yes>.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
Follow the procedures below.
1Select the document size.
●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.
2Place the next document on the platen glass, and press .
●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
3Tap <Start TX>.
●The faxes are sent.
Faxing
118
●If you always want to send faxes with the same settings:
Changing Default Settings(P. 139)
●If you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook:
Off-Hook Alarm (P. 498)
LINKS
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 140)
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes(P. 146)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Specifying from Address Book(P. 121)
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 124)
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons(P. 127)
Faxing
119
Sending from Registered Destinations
1469-026
You can specify destinations by selecting them from the Address Book, coded dial numbers, or one-touch buttons, as
well as by using the numeric keys. To use the Address Book, coded dial numbers, or one-touch buttons, you need to
register destinations beforehand. You can also specify previously used destinations.
Specifying from Address
Book(P. 121)
Selecting Destinations Directly
by Entering Coded Dial
Numbers(P. 124)
Specifying Destinations with the
One-Touch Buttons(P. 127)
Specifying Previously Used
Destinations(P. 130)
TIPS for Enhancing Security
●If you want to limit available destinations to ones from the Address Book or previously specied ones:
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
●If you want to disable specifying previously used destinations:
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations(P. 419)
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Faxing
120
Specifying from Address Book
1469-027
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of
registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient
names.
You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
1Press and tap <Addr. Book>.
2Use / to select a tab.
<All>
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.
<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>
Displays destinations with recipient names whose rst characters correspond to the characters of the
selected tab.
< >
Displays destinations for faxes.
<>
Displays destinations for sending e-mail. Do not use in this procedure.
Specifying from Address Book(P. 273)
< >
Displays destinations for shared folders. Do not use in this procedure.
Specifying from Address Book(P. 273)
<>
Faxing
121
Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.
<>
Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed.
3Select a destination.
If you want to specify multiple destinations
●Repeat the following steps. You can specify up to 104 destinations.
<Destination> <Specify from Address Book> Select a tab Select a destination.
●To specify any additional destinations with the numeric keys, tap <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric
Keys>.
4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
5Press to start sending.
●Scanning starts.
●If you want to cancel sending, press Tap <Yes>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
Faxing
122
3Tap <Remove> <Yes>.
●If you specied Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping Number of Destinations
displays destinations registered in the group.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 148)
Faxing
123
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial
Numbers
1469-028
You can directly enter the three-digit number (coded dial number) for a destination
to send a fax.
You need to register destinations in the coded dial numbers before using this feature.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 61)
1Press and tap <Coded Dial>.
2Use the numeric keys to enter a three-digit number (001 to 100), then tap <Apply>.
●If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to
delete all the input characters at once.)
If a conrmation screen appears
When <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the
destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the group name and the number of destinations
are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, and tap <OK>. If destinations are incorrect, tap
<Cancel> and re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Checking Destinations before Sending
Documents(P. 420)
If you want to specify multiple destinations
●Repeat the following steps. You can specify up to 100 destinations.
Faxing
124
<Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial> Enter a number.
●To specify any additional destinations with the numeric keys, tap <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric
Keys>.
3Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
4Press to start sending.
●Scanning starts.
●If you want to cancel sending, press Tap <Yes>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove> <Yes>.
●If you specied Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping Number of Destinations
displays destinations registered in the group.
Faxing
125
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 148)
Faxing
126
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons
1469-029
Tap one-touch buttons in the <Home> Screen to specify destinations.
You need to register destinations before using one-touch dialing.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 61)
1Press and tap any one of <One-Touch 1> to <One-Touch 4>.
If a conrmation screen appears
If <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a conrmation screen appears with the
destination and destination name registered to the one-touch button (if a destination registered for Group
Dial, the group name and number of destinations appears). Conrm the destinations are correct, and tap
<OK>. If destinations are incorrect, tap <Cancel> and tap the one-touch buttons again. Checking
Destinations before Sending Documents(P. 420)
Selecting several destinations
Destinations can be added from the Address Book, coded dial numbers, one-touch dial numbers, numeric
keys, and recall settings. Tap <Destination>.
2Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
Faxing
127
3Press to start sending.
●Scanning starts.
●If you want to cancel sending, press Tap <Yes>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove> <Yes>.
●If you specied Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping Number of Destinations
displays destinations registered in the group.
Faxing
128
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 148)
Faxing
129
Specifying Previously Used Destinations
1469-02A
You can select a destination from among the past three destinations.
●When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of
Previously Used Destinations(P. 419)
●Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and
disables this feature. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
●Destinations specied when sending a fax manually are not retained, and so do not appear in the past
destinations. Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 147)
When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specied are deleted.
1Press and tap <Fax>.
2Select <Destination> <Recall Set.>.
3Select a destination.
.
Faxing
130
4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
5Press to start sending.
●Scanning starts.
●If you want to cancel sending, press Tap <Yes>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove> <Yes>.
●If you specied Group Dial in step 2, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping Number of Destinations
displays destinations registered in the group.
Faxing
131
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Faxing
132
Various Fax Settings
1469-02C
A variety of settings are available to suit your needs, for example, when you want to adjust density or enhance the
clarity of an image.
Adjusting Resolution(P. 134) Adjusting Density(P. 135) Adjusting Sharpness(P. 136)
Scanning 2-Sided Documents
(MF249dw)(P. 138)
Faxing
133
Adjusting Resolution
1469-02E
You can select the resolution suitable for your document type. The higher the
resolution is, the clearer the image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.
<Fax> <Resolution> Select the resolution
<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>
Suitable for documents that contain text only.
<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>
Suitable for documents that contain ne text.
<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>
Suitable for documents that contain photographs.
<200 x 400 dpi (Superne)>
Achieves an even ner resolution than Fine.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Faxing
134
Adjusting Density
1469-02F
You can adjust the density of the fax if the text or images in a document are too light
or dark.
<Fax> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
<->
Decreases the density.
<+>
Increases the density.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Adjusting Sharpness(P. 136)
Faxing
135
Adjusting Sharpness
1469-02H
You can adjust sharpness of the image before sending. Increase the sharpness to
sharpen blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the
appearance of magazine photos.
<Fax> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>
<->
Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
<+>
Increases the image sharpness.
Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
Faxing
136
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Adjusting Density(P. 135)
Faxing
137
Scanning 2-Sided Documents
1469-02J
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of documents in the
feeder.
Place the documents in the feeder; the machine cannot scan both sides of documents automatically when the
documents are placed on the platen glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.
<Fax> <2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>
<Book Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 147)
Faxing
138
Changing Default Settings
1469-02K
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If
you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to
congure the same settings every time you send faxes.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the
setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
Fax Settings (P. 497)
Faxing
139
Canceling Sending Faxes
1469-02L
If you want to cancel sending faxes immediately after pressing , tap <Cancel> on the display or press . You
can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.
◼Use <Cancel> to cancel
◼Press to cancel
If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed
Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel.
◼Use to cancel
<TX Job> <Job Status> Select the document <Cancel> <Yes>
Faxing
140
Fax details
The number of sending document, settings, and other details are displayed. If you only want to check the
details without sending, press to return to the fax main screen.
<Cancel>
Cancels sending.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
141
Receiving Faxes
1469-02R
This section describes the methods for receiving faxes and how to set up the machine to receive faxes. You need to
complete some procedures for using fax functions before specifying the receiving settings. Conguring Initial
Settings for Fax Functions(P. 106)
The machine can print received fax documents on A4 or Letter size paper. If received fax documents are printed
on other paper sizes, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two separate sheets
of paper.
◼Methods for Receiving Faxes
The machine provides the following receiving methods. Select the method that best suits your needs and then set it up
by following the procedures in Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes(P. 143) .
<Auto>
Dedicated to receiving faxes
The machine receives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot talk
to the caller.
<Fax/Tel (Auto
Switch)>
When the call is a fax
The machine receives the fax automatically.
When the call is a telephone call
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.
You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.
<Manual>
When the call is a fax
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, tap <Start Receiving> to receive
faxes.
When the call is a telephone call
An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset and start your conversation.
●You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.
●You can set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within a
specied timeframe. Switch to Auto RX(P. 504)
<Answering
Machine>
When the call is a fax
After an incoming call rings, the machine receives the fax automatically.
When the call is a telephone call
The answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. If you pick up the
handset before the answering machine starts recording a message, you can talk with the caller.
Faxing
142
●You need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand.
●Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings.
●We recommend that you add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the
message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds.
<DRPD: Select Fax>
If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your
telephone company, this receiving mode is available. This service assigns two or more
telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line. You can use one of
these numbers for faxes and one for telephone calls.
When the machine receives a call, it automatically recognizes the ring pattern and your
telephone rings differently depending on whether the call is a fax or telephone call. If the ring
pattern is for a fax, the machine automatically receives the fax.
●For more information about this service, contact your telephone company.
●You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.
●Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes
properly.
●If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set the telephone to not receive faxes
automatically.
●If you pick up the telephone handset and hear a beep, the call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using
the telephone to enter a specic ID number.
Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)(P. 144)
◼Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes
1Press and tap <Fax>.
2Tap <RX Mode>.
3Select the receiving method.
Faxing
143
When selecting <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>
Specify the following three settings as necessary. When the setting is complete, tap <Apply>.
<Ring Start Time>
Enables you to specify the duration during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax
or a telephone call. (Setting values: 4 to 30 seconds; default setting: 6 seconds)
<Incoming Ring Time>
Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call. (Setting values:
15 to 300 seconds; default setting: 15 seconds)
<After Ring>
Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is
ringing. Select <End> to disconnect the call or <Receive> to receive an incoming fax. (Default setting:
<Receive>)
When selecting <DRPD: Select Fax>
Select the ring pattern that your telephone company assigned to your fax number.
●If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: Print on Both Sides(P. 504)
●If you want to print information, such as reception date and time, at the bottom of received documents:
RX Page Footer (P. 505)
●If you want to continue printing even when the toner cartridge is low: Continue Print. When Near Cart.
Life End (P. 506)
◼Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)
When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just
enter a specic ID number (default setting: 25) with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax.
When the telephone is not directly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not available.
Faxing
144
1When an incoming call rings, pick up the telephone handset.
2If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone.
●The ID number is set to 25 by default. You can change this number as necessary. Remote RX(P. 503)
3Hang up the handset.
LINKS
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your Purposes(P. 146)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
145
Sending and Receiving Faxes According to Your
Purposes
1469-02S
In addition to the basic sending and receiving methods, there are a variety of other methods to suit your purposes.
Making a Call before Sending
Faxes (Manual Sending)(P. 147)
Sending Faxes to Multiple
Destinations Simultaneously
(Sequential Broadcast)(P. 148)
Storing Received Faxes into
Memory (Memory Reception)
(P. 150)
Forwarding Received
Faxes(P. 154)
Receiving Fax Information
Services(P. 161)
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
146
Making a Call before Sending Faxes (Manual Sending)
1469-02U
You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a
beep over the phone, it means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Press
to send your faxes.
You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
●The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the documents in Manual Sending.
2Press and tap <Fax>.
3Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
4Dial the recipient's fax number.
5Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive your faxes.
●If you hear a beep, proceed to step 6.
6Press , and hang up the handset.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 140)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
147
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously
(Sequential Broadcast)
1469-02W
You can send faxes to up to 114 destinations at once. Use the numeric keys, the
Address Book, coded dial numbers, or one-touch buttons to specify destinations.
When <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> is set to <Reject Sequential Broadcast>, you cannot use this feature.
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting(P. 422)
You need to register destinations in the Address Book or one-touch buttons before using this feature.
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial(P. 65)
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Fax>.
3Specify the destination.
●To specify with the numeric keys, enter the fax number, and tap <Apply>. To specify any additional
destinations, select <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys> before repeating the same procedure.
●To specify from the Address Book Specifying from Address Book(P. 121)
Faxing
148
4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Various Fax Settings(P. 133)
5Press to start sending.
LINKS
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 140)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
149
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory
Reception)
1469-02X
You can store received faxes into memory, and then print them later. This feature
can prevent unauthorized persons from seeing condential documents
unintentionally. You can also preview received documents using the Remote UI.
Storing Documents into Memory(P. 150)
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 151)
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 151)
Previewing Documents from the Remote UI(P. 152)
The documents in memory can be also forwarded to a destination. Selecting a Document to Forward(P. 155)
Storing Documents into Memory
To store received documents into memory, set <Memory Lock Settings> to <On>. You can also specify optional settings
such as a time setting that species a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in
memory.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <On> Specify
each setting <Apply>
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
<Report Print>
Enables you to print RX Result reports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, tap
<On>. You also need to set <RX Result Report> to <On>. RX Result Report(P. 614)
<Memory Lock Time>
Specify a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in memory. If you do not set
a period of time, the machine stores every document into memory when Memory Reception is turned on.
Faxing
150
Printing Documents in Memory
To print received documents in memory, set <Memory Lock Settings> to <Off>. All the documents in memory are
printed.
●You cannot select a specic document for printing.
●If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specied, the documents are automatically printed at the
specied time.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <Off>
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory
You can check detailed information about the documents stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and
number of pages sent, and then delete unnecessary documents.
1Press .
2Tap <RX Job>.
3Tap <Job Status>.
Faxing
151
4Select the document you want to check.
To delete the checked document
1Tap <Delete>.
2Tap <Yes>.
Previewing Documents from the Remote UI
From the Remote UI, you can check the content of documents saved in memory. This allows you to check whether the
document is needed, and then delete it or print it.
●You cannot select a specic document for printing.
●If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specied, the documents are automatically printed at the
specied time.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Status Monitor/Cancel].
Faxing
152
3[RX] [Job Status] Click the document you want to check.
●Up to 3 pages starting from the top of a document can be previewed.
●Actual print results may be different from the document as previewed.
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
153
Forwarding Received Faxes
1469-02Y
You can forward received documents to other destinations. You can select a
document from among all the documents received in memory for forwarding, or set
the machine to automatically forward every received document to specied
destinations.
●Available destinations for forwarding are limited to the destinations registered in the Address Book. If no
destinations are registered, register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature.
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
●E-mail addresses and shared folders in computers can be specied as forwarding destinations on the
MF249dw / MF247dw only.
Faxing
154
Selecting a Document to Forward
1469-030
The machine forwards the document that you select from among all the documents received in memory. To use this
feature, rst activate the Memory Reception feature. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
(P. 150)
●As long as the Memory Reception feature is not deactivated, the documents in memory are not deleted even
after they are forwarded; the same documents can be forwarded multiple times.
●Only fax numbers can be specied for forwarding destinations.
1Press .
2Tap <RX Job>.
3Tap <Job Status>.
4Select the document you want to forward.
5Tap <Forward>.
Faxing
155
6Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book.
●For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 121) .
➠The document is forwarded to the specied destination.
Faxing
156
Forwarding All the Received Documents Automatically
1469-031
The machine can forward all the received documents to specied destinations. Even if you are out of the oce, you
can receive fax information anytime, anywhere.
Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically(P. 157)
Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 157)
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 158)
●Only e-mail addresses and shared folders can be specied for forwarding destinations.
●Received documents are converted and sent as PDF les.
Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically
While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Enable Forwarding Settings> <On>
Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book
●For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 121) .
Printing Documents to be Forwarded
If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents
whenever they are forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Print Images> Select <On> or <Only
When Error Occurs>
Faxing
157
<On>
Prints all the documents to be forwarded.
<Only When Error Occurs>
Prints only the documents that failed to be forwarded.
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded
You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory, and print, resend, or delete them later.
◼Storing Documents that Failed to be Forwarded in Memory
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Store Images in Memory> <Only When
Error Occurs>
◼Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents Stored in Memory
1Press .
2Tap <Fax Forwarding Errors>.
3Select the document you want to check.
Faxing
158
To print the checked document
1Tap <Print/Fwd>.
2Tap <Print>.
3Tap <Yes>.
To resend the checked document
1Tap <Print/Fwd>.
2Tap <Forward>.
3Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book.
Faxing
159
●Only fax numbers can be specied for forwarding destinations.
●For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 121) .
To delete the checked document
1Tap <Delete>.
2Tap <Yes>.
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 163)
Faxing
160
Receiving Fax Information Services
1469-032
Through fax information services, you can easily get a variety of helpful lifestyle and
work information from companies and organizations. This section describes a typical
procedure for receiving these services.
Depending on the service, actual procedures may differ from the ones described below. Follow the procedures
for the service you are using.
1Press and tap <Fax>.
2Tap <Hook>.
●If an external telephone is connected to the machine, you can pick up the handset instead of tapping
<Hook>.
3When you hear a dial tone, dial the information service.
4When the recorded message of the information service answers, press .
●This step is unnecessary if the machine is using a tone-dialing line.
Faxing
161
5Use the numeric keys to enter the service number assigned for the information you
want to receive.
●You can also use the keypad on the telephone to enter the information service number.
6Tap <Start Receiving>.
●If you have picked up the handset, hang it up.
LINKS
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Faxing
162
Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received
Documents
1469-033
The statuses and communication logs for sent and received fax documents can be checked separately for sending and
receiving. You can check detailed document information, including destinations and number of pages, and you can
delete unnecessary documents.
When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs.
Display Job Log (P. 533)
The destinations in Manual Sending cannot be checked because they are not displayed.
1Press .
2Tap <TX Job> or <RX Job>.
3Check the statuses and communication logs for sent and received documents.
To check the statuses for sent and received documents
1Tap <Job Status>.
2Select the document whose status you want to check.
Faxing
163
<TX Job Status>/<Fax RX Job Status>
Displays a list of the documents that are being sent and received or are waiting to be processed.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. If you specied multiple
destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of
specied multiple destinations, tap <Destination>. If you nd an unnecessary document, tap <Cancel>
or <Delete>, and tap <Yes>.
To check the communication logs for sent and received documents
1Tap <Job Log>.
2Select the document whose log you want to check.
<TX Job Log>/<Fax RX Job Log>
Displays a list of the documents that were sent and received. <OK> is displayed when a document was
sent or received successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be sent or received
because it was canceled or there was some error.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.
If the <Result> column shows a three-digit number
This number represents an error code. When an Error Code Appears(P. 559)
LINKS
TX Result Report(P. 609)
Communication Management Report(P. 612)
RX Result Report(P. 614)
Faxing
164
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the
Supplied Software
1469-034
You can export Address Book data saved on the machine to a computer using the Address Book Import/Export Tool
contained on the supplied DVD-ROM. The data can be re-imported, providing a secure backup in case Address Book
data becomes erased due to repairs or maintenance.
Use the Address Book Import/Export Tool with the machine and computer connected via a USB cable.
1Press and tap <Menu>.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Import/Export Address Book>.
4Place the provided DVD-ROM in the PC.
●When the next screen appears, click [Exit].
Faxing
165
5[Start] [Computer] Right-click the DVD-ROM icon, and click [Open] in the pop-up
menu.
6Open the [AddressBookTool] folder, and double-click [AddressBookTool.exe].
7Follow the on-screen instructions.
●To import Address Book data, click the [Import] tab.
●To export Address Book data, click the [Export] tab.
Faxing
166
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)
1469-0E5
You can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature
eliminates the need to print documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to complete some procedures, such as
specifying the basic fax settings ( Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 106) ) and referring to the MF
Driver Installation Guide to install the fax driver on your computer, before using this feature.
●If you are a Mac OS user, see the Fax Driver's User's Guide for installing the fax driver and see the Fax
Driver's Help for using fax functions.
●Depending on the operating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in
this manual may differ from your screens.
About the Fax Driver Help
●Clicking [Help] on the fax driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen you can see information that
is not in the User's Guide, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used
settings and how to set up those features.
Faxing
167
Sending PC Faxes
1469-0E6
●When <Allow Fax Driver TX> is set to <Off> on the machine, you cannot send faxes from computers.
Prohibiting PC Faxing(P. 418)
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].
When sending from the Windows Store app in Windows 8/10/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen and use the procedure shown below.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Tap or click [Devices] the fax driver for this machine [Print].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Tap or click [Devices] [Print] the fax driver for this machine [Print].
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] in the application menu the fax driver for this machine [Print].
●If you send faxes using this method, only a limited number of fax functions are available.
●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and proceed to step 3. This message appears when the machine is set to display the user
name during sending a fax and similar instances.
3Specify the destination.
To specify only one destination
1Click the [Enter Destination] tab.
2Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI).
Faxing
168
To specify multiple destinations at once
1Click the [Select Destination] tab.
2Click [Add Destination].
3Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI), and click [OK].
4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations.
●You can also add a destination by clicking [Add Next Destination] in step 3.
●If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings] [Add Outside Dialing
Prex to G3/IP Fax Number] and enter the number in [Outside Dialing Prex]. The specied number is added
to the beginning of the fax number when the machine dials.
Faxing
169
●To make it easier to specify destinations using the Address Book, see Using Registered
Destinations(P. 182) .
●Selecting [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] enables you to store the logs for sending documents and
check detailed information of a sent document along with its image, including destinations and number of
pages. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
●When the [Conrm Fax Number] or [Conrm URI] eld is active, also enter the appropriate number in the
eld. The setting of whether to conrm entered numbers can be changed in the fax driver screen. For
more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
4Attach a cover sheet to the document as necessary. Attaching Cover Sheets to PC
Faxes(P. 171)
5Click [Send] to send the document.
Faxing
170
Attaching Cover Sheets to PC Faxes
1469-0E7
You can attach a cover sheet to the document you are sending. Select a cover sheet from three preset cover sheets in
the fax driver, or create your own custom cover sheets. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].
3Click the [Cover Sheet] and specify each setting.
[Cover Sheet Attachment]
Select [Different Sheet to Each Destination] or [Same Sheet to All Destinations].
Faxing
171
[Style]
Select a cover sheet from the three preset cover sheets ([Template 1] to [Template 3]). The layout of the
selected cover sheet is displayed in the image on the left.
[Items to Include]
Displays items that are to be included on a cover sheet. To change the items to be included, click
[Settings].
[Sender] tab
Select the sender items you want to include and enter the information.
[Destination] tab
Select the destination items you want to include and enter the information. Destination names, company
names, department names, and fax numbers specied in the [Select Destination]/[Enter Destination] tab (
Sending PC Faxes(P. 168) ) are included on the cover sheet.
[Logo] tab/[Signature] tab
Specify each setting. The following screen shows an example for when the [Logo] tab is selected.
Faxing
172
With/without logos or signatures
Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] if you want to include logos or signatures on the cover
sheet. Have the bitmap les for logos or signatures ready beforehand.
Location of logos or signature les
Specify the location where logos or signatures les are saved. Click [Browse] to locate the le you are
using for logos or signatures.
Size and position of the specied logos or signatures
Adjust the size and position of the specied logos or signatures while checking the image displayed on the
left.
[Details] tab
[Include Number of Sheets to Send]
Select this check box if you want to include the number of sheets that you are going to send in the cover
sheet and specify the number of sheets in [Number of Sheets to Send]. The number of sheets to send is
not counted automatically. The value specied here is included in the cover sheet.
[Include Title]
Select this check box if you want to add a title to the cover sheet and enter the title in [Title].
4If you want to insert an attention note, select [Insert Attention Note] and select a
note from the [Attention Note] drop-down list.
●Attention notes such as "Urgent" and "Condential" are available. You can also enter characters directly in
[Attention Note] instead of selecting a note from the list.
●You can also add comments in [Comment to Include].
Faxing
173
5Click [Preview] to check the contents of the cover sheet, and if everything is correct,
click [OK].
●To modify the contents, perform the steps from 3 again.
➠The specied cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.
Faxing
174
Using Address Book for PC Faxes
1469-0E8
Once you register frequently used destinations for PC faxes in the Address Book, you
can easily specify destinations whenever you send PC faxes. Also, Address Book data
in CSV format created on applications such as Microsoft Excel can be imported into
the machine, or the Address Book data can be exported to a le for use on other fax
machines or applications.
◼Changing Location to Save Address Book Data
The location to save Address Book data can be changed to any arbitrary folder. You cannot use the Address Book if
you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book is saved. In this case, change the save
location of the Address Book.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the fax driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].
3Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
4Click [Specify a Folder].
Faxing
175
5Specify the location to save the Address Book data, and click [OK].
●Save the Address Book data in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write
permission.
6Click [New] or [Copy].
●To create a new and empty Address Book, click [New], and to just change the save location while keeping the
present Address Book content as is, click [Copy].
●Even if you change the Address Book save location, it does not result in deletion of the Address Book data
in the original folder.
●If Address Book data already exists in the save location specied in step 5, the following message is
displayed. If you want to use the existing Address Book, click [Use as-is], and if you want to overwrite it
with the present Address Book, click [Overwrite].
Faxing
176
Faxing
177
Registering Destinations
1469-0E9
This section describes how to register destinations in the Address Book for PC faxes. You can select single destinations
from among those registered in the Address Book to make one group destination (Group Dial), which is useful when
sending to multiple destinations at once.
Registering Destinations(P. 178)
Registering Multiple Destinations as One Destination (Group Dial)(P. 180)
●A total of 6,000 destinations can be registered: 3,000 for single destinations and 3,000 for group
destinations.
●You can select and combine registered group destinations and register them as separate group
destinations.
●You cannot use the Address Book if you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book
is saved. Log on as a user who has permission to access the folder, or change the save location of the
Address Book. Changing Location to Save Address Book Data(P. 175)
Registering Destinations
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the fax driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].
3Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
Faxing
178
4Click [Add Person].
●To change or delete registered destinations, select a destination from [Address Book], and click [Edit] or
[Delete].
5Specify each setting and click [OK].
Address
Enter the recipient name, company name, and department name.
[Notes]
Enter comments as necessary.
Fax Number
Enter the fax number(s). Hyphens can be inserted between numbers as necessary. If you want to add
explanations of the uses for the fax numbers, such as "Home" or "Oce", enter them in [Description].
Faxing
179
Registering Multiple Destinations as One Destination (Group Dial)
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the fax driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].
3Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
4Click [Add Group].
●To change or delete registered destinations, select a destination from [Address Book], and click [Edit] or
[Delete].
Faxing
180
5Specify each setting and click [OK].
[Group Name]
Enter a group name such as "Sales Department 1."
[Show]
Select the type of the destinations to display in [Available Destinations], from which you can select the
destinations to register in Group Dial.
[Person]
Displays single destinations.
[Group]
Displays group destinations.
[All]
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.
[Available Destinations]
Select the destinations to register in Group Dial, and click [Add]. The selected destinations are displayed in
[Current Group Members].
●To select multiple destinations, click the destinations while holding down [SHIFT] key or [CTRL] key.
●To delete a destination from [Current Group Members], select a destination and click [Delete].
[Notes]
Enter comments as necessary.
Faxing
181
Using Registered Destinations
1469-0EA
This section describes how to specify destinations registered in the Address Book. Registering Destinations(P. 178)
●You cannot use the Address Book if you do not have permission to access the folder where the Address Book
is saved. Log on as a user who has permission to access the folder, or change the save location of the
Address Book. Changing Location to Save Address Book Data(P. 175)
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].
3Click the [Select Destination] tab select the Address Book from [Address Book List].
4Select a destination and click [Add to Destination List].
Faxing
182
●To specify multiple destinations, repeat step 4.
●You can search for destinations with [Address List].
●Clicking [Edit Address Book] allows you to edit the Address Book.
Faxing
183
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data from the Fax
Driver
1469-0EC
Address Book data in CSV format created on applications such as Microsoft Excel can be imported into the machine, or
the Address Book data can be exported to a le for use on other fax machines or applications.
Importing Address Book Data(P. 184)
Exporting Address Book Data(P. 185)
Importing Address Book Data
The le formats that can be read into the fax driver are the following three: CSV le (*.csv), Canon Address Book le
(*.abk), and device conguration information le (*.dcm).
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the fax driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].
3Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
4Click [Import].
Faxing
184
5Select the le to import and click [Open].
●For a CSV le, specify the separators used in the le.
➠The destinations imported from the le are displayed in [Address Book].
Exporting Address Book Data
The le formats that can be written out from the fax driver are the following two: CSV le (*.csv) and Canon Address
Book le (*.abk).
Faxing
185
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the fax driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].
3Click the [Select Destination] tab [Edit Address Book].
4Click [Export].
Faxing
186
●If you have selected [Protect with Password when Exporting Address List] in the dialog box that is
displayed when [Security Settings] of the [Special] tab is clicked, a dialog box for entering a password is
displayed when you click [Export]. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.
5Specify the location to save the le, the le name, and the le format, and then click
[Save].
●For a CSV le, specify the separators used in the le.
➠The Address Book data is exported to the specied location.
Faxing
187
Using the Machine as a Printer
Using the Machine as a Printer .............................................................................................................. 189
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 190
Printing a Document .................................................................................................................................... 191
Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 195
Checking the Printing Status ........................................................................................................................ 198
Various Print Settings ................................................................................................................................... 199
Enlarging or Reducing ........................................................................................................................... 201
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF249dw / MF247dw) ............................................................. 203
Collating Printouts by Page .................................................................................................................... 205
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet ................................................................................................ 207
Printing Posters ..................................................................................................................................... 209
Printing Booklet (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................................................................ 211
Printing Borders .................................................................................................................................... 213
Printing Dates and Page Numbers ......................................................................................................... 214
Printing Watermarks .............................................................................................................................. 216
Selecting Document Type ...................................................................................................................... 218
Saving Toner .......................................................................................................................................... 220
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents ........................................................................................ 222
Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs ..................................................................................................... 226
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings ................................................................. 227
Changing Default Settings ..................................................................................................................... 229
Using the Machine as a Printer
188
Using the Machine as a Printer
1469-03E
There are many ways to use the machine as a printer. You can print documents on your computer by using the printer
driver, or print from mobile devices. Make full use of the print functions to suit your needs.
◼Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver. Printing from a Computer(P. 190)
Printing from Mobile Devices
●Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (P. 289)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 308)
Using the Machine as a Printer
189
Printing from a Computer
1469-03F
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your
documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as
installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see "MF Driver Installation Guide".
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
●If you are a Mac OS user, see Printer Driver's User's Guide for installing the printer drivers and Printer
Driver's Help for using print functions.
●Depending on the operating system and the type or version of the printer driver you are using, the printer
driver screens in this manual may differ from your screens.
●If you are using the MF249dw / MF247dw, you can use the PCL6 printer driver as well as the UFRII LT printer
driver. The available print settings vary depending on the printer driver. For more information, click [Help]
on each printer driver screen.
Using the Machine as a Printer
190
Printing a Document
1469-0EE
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
●Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before
proceeding to printing. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
●The screen that is displayed differs depending on the application you are using.
3Specify the paper size.
[Page Size]
Select the size of a document made in the application.
Using the Machine as a Printer
191
[Output Size]
Select the size of paper on which the document will be actually printed. If the selected size differs from the
one specied in [Page Size], the document is printed enlarged/reduced automatically according to the
selected size. Enlarging or Reducing(P. 201)
Clickable UI
●You can easily specify the page layout, binding position, etc. intuitively on the preview image. For more
information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.
4In the [Page Setup] tab, select the paper type.
●Set [Paper Type] according to the type of paper to be used in the printing. Loading Paper(P. 45)
5Specify other print settings as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 199)
●You can register the settings you specied in this step as a "prole" and use the prole whenever you
print. You can eliminate the need to specify the same settings every time you print. Registering
Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings(P. 227)
6Click [OK].
Using the Machine as a Printer
192
7Click [Print] or [OK].
➠Printing starts. On some applications, a screen like shown below appears.
●To cancel printing, click [Cancel] when the screen shown above is displayed. After the screen disappears
or if the screen is not displayed, you can cancel printing in other ways. Canceling Prints(P. 195)
When printing from the Windows Store app in Windows 8/10/Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen and use the procedure shown below.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Tap or click [Devices] the printer driver for this machine [Print].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Tap or click [Devices] [Print] the printer driver for this machine [Print].
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] in the application menu the printer driver for this machine [Print].
●If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the
machine is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
LINKS
Using the Machine as a Printer
193
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 456)
Using the Machine as a Printer
194
Canceling Prints
1469-0EF
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 195)
From the Operation Panel(P. 196)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
●Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for the machine).
2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].
3Click [Yes].
➠Printing of the selected document is canceled.
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
●You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print
Documents(P. 456)
Using the Machine as a Printer
195
Canceling from an application
●On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using or .
◼Press to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed
Tap the document to cancel.
◼Check the Print Job Status before Canceling
<Print Job Status> Select the document on the <Print Job Status> screen <Cancel>
<Yes>
Using the Machine as a Printer
196
●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Checking the Printing Status(P. 198)
Using the Machine as a Printer
197
Checking the Printing Status
1469-0EH
You can check the current print statuses.
Useful in the Following Cases
●When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
●When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1Press .
2Tap <Print Job Status>.
3Select the document to check.
<Print Job Status>
Displays a list of the documents that are being processed or are waiting to be processed.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Canceling Prints(P. 195)
Using the Machine as a Printer
198
Various Print Settings
1469-0EJ
There are a variety of settings to suit your needs, such as Enlarged/Reduced and 2-sided Printing.
Enlarging or Reducing(P. 201) Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided
Printing (MF249dw / MF247dw)
(P. 203)
Collating Printouts by
Page(P. 205)
Printing Multiple Pages onto
One Sheet(P. 207)
Printing Posters(P. 209) Printing Booklet (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 211)
Printing Borders(P. 213) Printing Dates and Page
Numbers(P. 214)
Printing Watermarks(P. 216)
Using the Machine as a Printer
199
Selecting Document Type(P. 218) Saving Toner(P. 220) Combining and Printing Multiple
Documents(P. 222)
Using the Machine as a Printer
200
Enlarging or Reducing
1469-0EK
You can make enlarged or reduced printouts by using a preset print ratio, such as
Statement to Letter, or a custom print ratio that you set in increments of 1%.
Setting Print Ratio by Specifying the Original Document and Paper Size (Preset Ratio)
The print ratio is automatically set based on the document and paper size you have specied.
[Basic Settings] tab Select the document size in [Page Size] Select the paper size in [Output
Size] [OK]
Specifying Print Ratio in Increments of 1%
[Basic Settings] tab Select the [Manual Scaling] check box Enter the print ratio in [Scaling]
[OK]
Using the Machine as a Printer
201
●Depending on the selected paper size, you may not be able to set the optimum enlarging/reducing ratio. For
example, there may be large blank spaces on your printout, or portions of the document that are missing.
●The enlarging/reducing settings on some applications have priority over those on the printer driver.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Using the Machine as a Printer
202
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing
1469-0EL
You can make both 1-sided and 2-sided printouts. The default setting is [2-sided Printing].
Change the setting as necessary.
●2-sided printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Paper(P. 649)
[Basic Settings] tab Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet
Printing] Select the position to bind in [Binding Location] [OK]
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]
Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing].
●For [Booklet Printing], see Printing Booklet (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 211) .
[Binding Location]
Specify the position to bind the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler. Printing orientation will be
changed depending on the specied binding position. To specify the margin width for the binding position,
click [Gutter].
[Long Edge [Left]]
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened horizontally when bound.
Using the Machine as a Printer
203
[Short Edge [Top]]
Prints images in such a way that the printed pages are opened vertically when bound.
[Gutter]
Specify a binding margin.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 207)
Printing Booklet (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 211)
Using the Machine as a Printer
204
Collating Printouts by Page
1469-0ER
When printing copies of multi-page documents, select [Collate] to print complete sets in
sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts for meetings or
presentations.
[Basic Settings] tab Select [Collate] or [Group] in [Collate/Group] [OK]
[Collate/Group]
Specify the sorting method of the printouts when printing multiple-page documents.
[Collate]
The printouts are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are printing
three copies of a ve-page document, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4,
5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
[Group]
The printouts are not collated. For example, if you are printing three copies of a ve-page document, the
printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.
Using the Machine as a Printer
205
●If you select [Off], whether the printouts are collated or not depends on the setting made on the
application.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Using the Machine as a Printer
206
Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet
1469-0ES
You can print multiple pages onto a single sheet. For example, you can print four or
nine pages onto a single sheet by using [4 on 1] or [9 on 1]. Use this function if you
want to save paper or to view your document in thumbnails.
●To save more paper, combine this setting with 2-sided printing. Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing
(MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 203)
[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet In
[Page Order], select the page distribution layout [OK]
[Page Layout]
Select the number of pages to print onto a single sheet from [1 on 1] to [16 on 1]. For example, to print 16
pages onto a single sheet, select [16 on 1].
●For options such as [Poster [2 x 2]], see Printing Posters(P. 209) .
●Printing may not be performed properly if you combine this setting with an application setting for
collating printouts.
Using the Machine as a Printer
207
[Page Order]
Select a page distribution layout. For example, if you select [Across from Left], the rst page is printed on the
top left, and then the rest of the pages are arranged rightward.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 203)
Using the Machine as a Printer
208
Printing Posters
1469-0EU
You can print one page of a document onto multiple pages. For example, if you make
a one-page Letter-size document nine times larger, you will have a poster 3x3 Letter
size sheets large after you print the document and paste it together.
[Basic Settings] tab In [Page Layout], select the dimensions of your poster (for example, [Poster [2
x 2]]) [OK]
[Page Layout]
Select the layout for poster printing. There are four size settings:[Poster [1 x 2]], [Poster [2 x 2]], [Poster [3 x
3]], and [Poster [4 x 4]].
●Poster size settings cannot be selected when 2-sided printing is enabled. Select [1-sided Printing] in [1-
sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing], and then select a poster size setting.
[Poster Details]
The screen below appears.
Using the Machine as a Printer
209
[Print Margin Borders]
Borders are printed on each page. The borders are helpful if you want to paste the printouts together or
cut off the margins.
[Set Margins for Cutting/Pasting]
Prints margins to allow cutting or pasting. To print markings so that margins can be easily identied,
select the [Print Marks for Alignment] check box.
[Pages to Print]
●[All Pages]: Carry out poster printing for all pages.
●[Specify Pages]: Carry out poster printing only for specied pages.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Enlarging or Reducing(P. 201)
Using the Machine as a Printer
210
Printing Booklet
1469-0EW
You can print two pages of a document on both sides of paper and then fold your
printed pages in half to make a booklet. The printer driver controls the print order in
such a way that the page numbers are correctly arranged.
●Booklet printing may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. The paper that is available for 2-
sided printing is also available for booklet printing. See Paper(P. 649) .
[Basic Settings] tab Select [Booklet Printing] in [1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing] Click
[Booklet] to specify detailed settings as necessary [OK] [OK]
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing]
Select [Booklet Printing].
●For [1-sided Printing] and [2-sided Printing], see Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 203) .
[Booklet]
The screen below is displayed.
Using the Machine as a Printer
211
[Booklet Printing Method]
●[All Pages at Once]: Prints all of the pages at once as a single bundle so that you can make a booklet just
by folding the printed pages in half.
●[Divide into Sets]: Prints as multiple bundles divided by the number of the pages specied on [Sheets
per Set]. Bind each bundle, and then combine them as one booklet. Select this option when the
document has so many pages that you cannot bind them all into a single booklet.
[Specify Booklet Gutter]
If you are using a stapler or other binding tools, specify the margin width for binding your booklet. Select
the [Specify Booklet Gutter] check box and specify the margin width in [Booklet Gutter].
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Using the Machine as a Printer
212
Printing Borders
1469-0EX
You can add borders, such as broken lines or double lines, in the margins of
printouts.
[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the border type in [Edging] [OK] [OK]
[Edging]
Select the border type.
Preview
Displays a preview with the selected border.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Printing Dates and Page Numbers(P. 214)
Printing Watermarks(P. 216)
Using the Machine as a Printer
213
Printing Dates and Page Numbers
1469-0EY
You can print the information such as dates or page numbers, and you can specify
where to print this information on the document (upper-left, lower-right, etc.).
[Page Setup] tab Click [Page Options] Select the print position of the print date, user name or
page number [OK] [OK]
[Print Date]
Specify the position to print the print date.
[Print User Name]
Specify the position to print the user name (logon name) for the computer used to print the document.
[Print Page Number]
Specify the position to print the page number.
Changing the Print Format of Dates and Page Numbers
●You can change formatting details such as font and font size when printing dates, logon names, or page
numbers. Click [Format Settings] on the [Page Options] screen shown above to specify the details.
Using the Machine as a Printer
214
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Printing Borders(P. 213)
Printing Watermarks(P. 216)
Using the Machine as a Printer
215
Printing Watermarks
1469-0F0
You can print watermarks such as "COPY" or "CONFIDENTIAL" over the document.
You can create new watermarks or use pre-registered watermarks.
[Page Setup] tab Select the [Watermark] check box Select a watermark from the drop-down list
[OK]
[Watermark]
Select the [Watermark] check box to display the list of the watermarks in the drop-down list. Select a
watermark from the menu.
[Edit Watermark]
Displays the screen to create or edit watermarks.
Using the Machine as a Printer
216
[Add]
Click to create a new watermark. Up to 50 watermarks can be registered.
[Name]
Enter the created watermark name.
[Attributes]/[Alignment]/[Print Style]
Click each tab to specify the text, color, or print position of the watermark. For more information, click [Help]
on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Printing Borders(P. 213)
Printing Dates and Page Numbers(P. 214)
Using the Machine as a Printer
217
Selecting Document Type
1469-0F1
You can specify the document type to ensure optimal image quality. There are
different settings for photo documents, documents that have charts or graphs, and
documents that have design drawings with ne lines.
[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] [OK]
[Objective]
Select an option that suits the document type or purpose of printing. For example, select [General] for
general use, or select [Photos] when you want to print photo images in optimal print quality.
[General]
A versatile option that is suitable when printing most documents.
[Publications]
Suitable when printing documents that have a mix of photo images, charts, and graphs.
[Graphics]
Suitable when printing documents that have charts or graphs.
[Photos]
Suitable when printing photo images.
[Designs [CAD]]
Suitable when printing design drawings that have many ne lines.
[High Denition Text]
Suitable when printing documents that have small characters.
Using the Machine as a Printer
218
●To specify detailed settings for each item selected on [Objective], click [Advanced Settings]. For more
information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Using the Machine as a Printer
219
Saving Toner
1469-0F2
You can set the printer driver to print documents using less toner.
●When the toner save setting is enabled, ne lines and portions with lighter print density may become
blurred.
[Quality] tab Select the document type in [Objective] Click [Advanced Settings] Select [Toner
Save] in the [Advanced Settings] screen Select [On] from the drop-down list [OK] [OK]
[Objective] Selecting Document Type(P. 218)
Select the document type for which you want to enable the toner save setting.
Using the Machine as a Printer
220
[Advanced Settings]
A screen with settings is displayed. Click [Toner Save] and select [On] from the drop-down list on the bottom
of the screen.
●You can specify whether to enable the toner save setting for each document type. Specify the toner save
setting for each document type listed in [Objective].
●In the [Advanced Settings] screen, you can specify various print settings other than toner save settings.
For more information, click [Help] on the printer driver screen.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Using the Machine as a Printer
221
Combining and Printing Multiple Documents
1469-0F3
By using Canon PageComposer, you can combine multiple documents into one print
job and print the job with specied print settings. This function, for example, enables
you to combine documents made with different applications and print all of the
pages in the same paper size.
1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3Select [Edit and Preview] in [Output Method].
●Click [OK] on the [Information] pop-up screen.
●Click [OK] at the bottom of the screen.
4Click [Print] or [OK].
Using the Machine as a Printer
222
➠The Canon PageComposer starts. Printing does not start in this step.
5Repeat steps 1 to 4 for the documents you want to combine.
➠The documents are added to the Canon PageComposer.
6From the [Document Name] list, select the documents to combine, and click .
●To select multiple documents, click the documents while holding down [SHIFT] key or [CTRL] key.
7Change the settings as necessary, and click [Combine].
●The documents selected in step 6 are combined.
Using the Machine as a Printer
223
[Print Preview]
Displays a preview of the document to be printed.
[Document List]/[Print Settings]
●Click the [Document List] tab to display the documents added in steps 1 to 4. You can remove
documents by selecting them in the list and clicking [Delete from List].
●Click the [Print Settings] tab to display the screen for specifying print settings such as the number of
copies or 1-sided/2-sided printing. The settings specied here are applied to the whole print job.
●For more information, click [Help] on the Canon PageComposer screen.
[Details]
Displays the print setting screen of the printer driver. There are fewer settings available than when using
the ordinary printing method.
Using the Machine as a Printer
224
8On the [Document Name] list, select the combined-document print job you want to
print, and click .
➠Printing starts.
●For instructions on how to cancel printing, see Canceling Prints(P. 195) .
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Using the Machine as a Printer
225
Conguring Print Settings to Your Needs
1469-0F4
You can register combinations of settings as "Proles" to suit your different printing needs. Also, you can register the
settings that you frequently use as the default setting. Once the default setting is set, the registered settings are
automatically displayed on the printer driver screen, and you can skip the operations to specify the print settings and
print immediately.
Specify "TOP SECRET" for a watermark and register it as a
"Prole." Just select this "Prole" when you need it.
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print
Settings(P. 227)
Specify [2 on 1] as the user default in the printer driver.
The next and following print jobs will be performed so
that each two pages are shrinked and printed on one
page. Changing Default Settings(P. 229)
Using the Machine as a Printer
226
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print
Settings
1469-0F5
Specifying combinations of settings such as "1-sided landscape orientation on Letter size paper" every time you print
may be time consuming. If you register these frequently used combinations of print settings as "proles," you can
specify printing settings simply by selecting one of these proles from the list. This section describes how to register
proles and how to print using them.
Registering a Prole(P. 227)
Selecting a Prole(P. 228)
Registering a Prole
1Change the settings that you want to register as a prole, and click [Add].
●Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each
screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 199)
2Enter a prole name in [Name], select an icon, and then click [OK].
●Enter comments on the prole in [Comment] as necessary.
●Click [View Settings] to see the settings to register.
Editing a prole
●By clicking [Edit] on the right side of [Add] on the screen shown in step 1, you can change the name, icon, or
comment of the proles you have previously registered. You cannot edit the pre-registered proles.
Using the Machine as a Printer
227
Selecting a Prole
Select the prole that suits your needs, and click [OK].
Changing the settings of the selected prole
●You can change the settings of a selected prole. In addition, the changed settings can be registered as
another prole.
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Changing Default Settings(P. 229)
Using the Machine as a Printer
228
Changing Default Settings
1469-0F6
The default settings are the settings that are rst displayed whenever you open the print settings screen of the printer
driver, but you can change them. For example, if you want to print all documents in such manner that each two pages
are shrinked and printed on one page, specify [2 on 1] as the user default of page layout. From next time on, the
printer driver will be opened with [2 on 1] specied as page layout setting and you will not have to change settings
each time you print.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printing preferences].
3Change the settings on the print setting screen, and click [OK].
●Click the [Basic Settings], [Page Setup], [Finishing], or [Quality] tabs to specify the print settings on each
screen as necessary. Various Print Settings(P. 199)
Using the Machine as a Printer
229
LINKS
Printing a Document(P. 191)
Registering Combinations of Frequently Used Print Settings(P. 227)
Using the Machine as a Printer
230
Using the Machine as a Scanner
Using the Machine as a Scanner ........................................................................................................... 232
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner .................................................................................................... 233
Scanning from the Machine .............................................................................................................................. 234
Scanning Using the <Scan -> PC> Button ...................................................................................................... 237
Scanning from a Computer ............................................................................................................................... 241
Scanning Using an Application ..................................................................................................................... 242
Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF ................................................................................................... 244
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation (MF249dw / MF247dw) ........................................... 245
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine ........................................................................... 246
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder ................................................................................................ 253
Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) ................................................................................. 256
Specifying Detailed Settings ......................................................................................................................... 258
Specifying a Scanning Size ..................................................................................................................... 260
Setting Color Mode ................................................................................................................................ 261
Selecting a File Format ........................................................................................................................... 262
Adjusting Density ................................................................................................................................... 264
Specifying Orientation of Your Document .............................................................................................. 265
Selecting Document Type ...................................................................................................................... 266
Scanning 2-Sided Documents (MF249dw) .............................................................................................. 267
Adjusting Sharpness .............................................................................................................................. 268
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality ........................................................................ 270
Setting Gamma Values ........................................................................................................................... 271
Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-Mail/Shared Folder) .................................................................... 272
Specifying from Address Book ............................................................................................................... 273
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers .......................................................... 276
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons ............................................................................ 279
Specifying Previously Used Destinations ................................................................................................ 281
Changing Default Settings ..................................................................................................................... 284
Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder) .......................................................... 286
Using the Machine as a Scanner
231
Using the Machine as a Scanner
1469-049
You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer.
Whichever way you use, the scanned documents are converted into electronic le formats such as PDFs. Use the scan
function to convert large-volume paper documents into les so that you can organize them easily.
●To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of
software to a computer. For more information, see "MF Driver Installation Guide." To connect the machine to
your computer via a network, you must register the machine to the installed software. Preparing to Use
the Machine as a Scanner (P. 233)
●If you are a Mac OS user, see the User's Guide for ScanGear MF for installing the software and for using scan
functions.
●Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the
screens in this manual may differ from your screens.
◼Scanning from the Machine
You can scan and save documents to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine. You can also send
documents as e-mail attachments.
Scanning from the Machine(P. 234)
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 245)
◼Scanning from a Computer
You can scan documents placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned documents are saved to the computer.
You can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing
or word-processing application. Scanning from a Computer(P. 241)
Scanning from Mobile Devices
●Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
scan documents set on this machine. Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (P. 289)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
232
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner
1469-04A
Make sure that the machine and your computer are connected and all software is installed. For how to check, see "MF
Driver Installation Guide." To connect via a wireless or wired LAN, you must register this machine in MF Network
Scanner Selector. Register by following the procedure below. This procedure is not required if the machine and your
computer are connected via USB.
The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment. Use
IPv4 or a USB connection.
1Click in the system tray.
2Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].
●Up to ten computers can be connected at a time on a network to one product (scanner).
Using the Machine as a Scanner
233
Scanning from the Machine
1469-04C
The sequence of "scanning a document and saving it to a computer" can be done
entirely from the machine. Scan while specifying what computer documents will be
saved to; whether to scan documents in color or black and white; whether to save
documents as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings.
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Scan>.
3Tap <Computer>.
4Select the destination computer.
●This screen is not displayed if only a computer is connected to the machine via USB.
5Select the scan type.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
234
Scan type Color Resolution File format
<Color Scan> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)
<B&W Scan> Black and white*1 300 dpi PDF (searchable*2)
<Custom 1> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)
<Custom 2> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)
*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.
*2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.
To change settings
●The settings in the table above are all factory default settings. You can change settings from MF Scan
Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
●If you are a Mac OS user, see the User's Guide for ScanGear MF.
6Press .
●Scanning starts.
●To cancel, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the
screen before scanning.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when le format is PDF).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
Using the Machine as a Scanner
235
●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Finish Scan>.
●The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
About the save destination folder
●By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning
date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.
●You can change the save destination from MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF
Scan Utility.
Scan from the machine more easily
●If you have regularly used preferences, such as scanning in color or black and white, or a pre-determined
computer where scanned documents will be saved, specifying these settings each time you scan can be
troublesome. Register these settings in a <Scan -> PC> button so that you can scan with one press of a
button. There are two <Scan -> PC> buttons: <Scan -> PC1> and <Scan -> PC2>. You can register your settings
in either of these buttons. Scanning Using the <Scan -> PC> Button(P. 237)
Other useful scanning functions (MF249dw / MF247dw)
●You can send scanned documents by e-mail. The documents can also be saved to shared folders. You can
accomplish these functions directly from the machine.
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
236
Scanning Using the <Scan -> PC> Button
1469-04E
Place a document on the machine, and tap <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2>, and
scanning starts immediately. The type of scan (color or black and white), the save
destination for the document, and other settings can be registered to a button, and
documents can be scanned using those settings. This section describes how to
register settings in a button and scan with it.
Registering Your Settings in the <Scan -> PC> Button(P. 237)
Using the <Scan -> PC> Button(P. 239)
Registering Your Settings in the <Scan -> PC> Button
Register the computer that scanned images are saved in and the type of scan to <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2>
button.
1Press and tap <Menu>.
2Tap <Scan Settings>.
3Select <Shortcut Key Settings> <Register>.
4Tap <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2>.
●Select the button to which you want to register settings.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
237
5Select the type of connection that is used between the machine and computer.
<Off>
Select this setting to erase registered settings.
<USB Connection>
Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via USB.
<Network Connection>
Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via a network.
6Select the destination computer.
●This screen is not displayed if you select <USB Connection> in step 5.
7Select the scan type.
Scan type Color Resolution File format
<Color Scan> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)
<B&W Scan> Black and white*1 300 dpi PDF (searchable*2)
*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.
*2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
238
Scan type Color Resolution File format
<Custom 1> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)
<Custom 2> Color 300 dpi JPEG (Exif)
*1 Documents are scanned in black and white only, with no intermediate shades of gray.
*2 A PDF format where characters on the document are scanned as text data and the text can be searched using a computer.
To change settings
●The settings in the table above are all factory default settings. You can change settings from MF Scan
Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
●If you are a Mac OS user, see the User's Guide for ScanGear MF.
◼Checking the Registered Settings
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Shortcut Key Settings> <Conrm Destination> Select <Scan ->
PC1> or <Scan -> PC2>
Name of destination computer
Shows the name of the computer registered as the save destination.
Scan type
Shows the type of scan that has been set.
Using the <Scan -> PC> Button
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2> button.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
239
●To check the settings registered in the button, see Checking the Registered Settings(P. 239) .
●Scanning starts.
●To cancel, tap <Cancel> <Yes>.
You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the
screen before scanning.
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when le format is PDF).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Finish Scan>.
●The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.
About the save destination folder
●By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning
date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.
●You can change the save destination from MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on MF
Scan Utility.
LINKS
Scanning from the Machine(P. 234)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
240
Scanning from a Computer
1469-04F
There are two ways to scan from a computer: using MF Scan Utility and using an application such as an image-
processing or word-processing application.
Scanning Using MF Scan Utility
MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan
documents or images to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specied
application, or attach it to an e-mail message. After installing it from the supplied DVD-
ROM, click [MF Scan Utility] displayed in the Windows start menu to start MF Scan Utility.
For details on using this utility, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
●If you are a Mac OS user, see the User's Guide for ScanGear MF.
Scanning Using an Application
You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or image-
processing application, and load the images directly into the application. You do not
need to start another application to scan.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
241
Scanning Using an Application
1469-04H
You can scan documents from applications such as image-processing or word-
processing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application, allowing
you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure varies
depending on the application.
●The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA*. For more information, see the instruction manual
for your application.
* TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an
integrated standard in Windows.
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
●The second or subsequent documents may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed
depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one document at a time.
●When <Auto Online for Remote Scan> is set to <Off>, you must tap <Scan> <Remote Scanner> in the
<Home> screen to bring the machine online. Auto Online for Remote Scan(P. 532)
2From the application, select the start scan command.
●The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more
information, see the instruction manual for your application.
3Select the scanner driver for the machine.
●Select ScanGear MF or WIA.
4Congure the scan settings as necessary.
●For more information about ScanGear MF scan settings, see Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear
MF(P. 244) .
5Click [Scan].
➠Scanning of the document starts.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
242
●When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.
LINKS
Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF(P. 244)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
243
Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF
1469-04J
ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear
MF to congure advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of
starting ScanGear MF differs depending of the way of scanning from the computer.
Starting from MF Scan Utility
When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For instructions on how to use
ScanGear MF, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.
●If you are a Mac OS user, see the User's Guide for ScanGear MF.
Starting from an Application
●To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as
scanner driver. Scanning Using an Application(P. 242)
●For instructions on how to use ScanGear MF, click on the ScanGear MF icon and see the Help.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
244
Convenient Scanning with a Machine-Based Operation
1469-04K
The machine can convert original documents into electronic le formats such as PDF without using a computer. There
are many advantages to digitizing documents. A variety of useful settings are available to suit your needs.
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine
You can save scanned documents as JPEG images, PDF les or in other digital le formats and send them
directly from the machine as e-mail attachments. You can work more eciently because this feature eliminates
the need to use your computer to send scanned documents. Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from
the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder
You can save scanned documents as JPEG images, PDF les or in other digital le formats and store them in
shared folders on computers. This feature is helpful when digitalizing paper documents for sharing. Saving
Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
245
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the
Machine
1469-04L
This section describes how to scan documents and send them as e-mails directly from the machine. Scanned
documents are sent as e-mail attachments in JPEG, PDF, or other digital le formats. You can specify multiple
destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, just like you can when sending normal e-mails.
●To send e-mails directly from the machine, you must complete preparations in advance, including
specication of mail server settings. Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 358)
●When you specify multiple destinations, the second and following destinations must be ones registered in
the Address Book. As for Cc and Bcc, you can only specify destinations registered in the Address Book. To
use the Address Book, you must complete the necessary registration procedure in advance.
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Scan>.
3Tap <E-Mail>.
4Enter the destination using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 38) .
Using the Machine as a Scanner
246
●To use the Address Book to quickly specify destinations: Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-Mail/
Shared Folder)(P. 272)
5Specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations, as necessary.
●Tap <Destination>, and select the method for specifying destinations.
6Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Tap the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 258)
●The le name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format:
"communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three
digits).le extension."
Example of le names: If a one-page document is converted into a PDF le and sent on October 17, 2015
at 07:00:05 P.M.
"0045_151017190005_001.pdf"
●You cannot specify le names yourself.
7Specify the subject, body, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail as necessary.
●The subject and the priority are set to "Attached Image" and "Standard" respectively by default.
●The body is not set by default. Enter it as necessary. Without the body text, only scanned documents are sent.
●The reply-to address is not set by default. If you want to display the reply-to address differently from that of
the machine, specify the address from among those registered in the Address Book. If no destination is
registered in the Address Book, see Registering in the Address Book(P. 60) .
Using the Machine as a Scanner
247
To specify subject/body
1Tap <Subject/Message>.
2Tap <Subject>.
3Enter the subject using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
4Tap <Message>.
5Enter the body using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
6Tap <Apply>.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
248
To specify reply-to address
1Tap <Reply To>.
2Tap <Specify from Address Book>.
3Select a reply-to address from the Address Book.
●For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 273) .
To specify priority
1Tap <Priority>.
2Select a priority level.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
249
8Press to start sending.
➠Scanning of the document starts.
●To cancel sending, tap <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)
(P. 256)
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the e-mail is sent.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format in step 6).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Start TX>.
➠The e-mail is sent.
If a Send Error Occurs
Error notications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may
result in an insucient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that
you clear the mailbox periodically.
To clear the mailbox
●When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail
account that you use usually, you should rst check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Using the Machine as a Scanner
250
3Click [Network Settings] [E-Mail Settings].
4Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].
5Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].
➠E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
251
●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 284)
●If you want to specify the e-mail sender name: Register Unit Name (E-Mail)(P. 511)
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 286)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
252
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder
1469-04R
This section describes how to scan documents and save them to a shared folder directly from the machine. Scanned
documents are saved as JPEG images, PDF les or in other digital le formats.
●To save documents directly to a shared folder, you must complete preparations in advance, including
specication of the save destination.
Conguring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders(P. 367)
●Available destinations for shared folders are limited to the destinations registered in the Address Book. To
specify a destination using the Address Book, it is necessary to register the destinations for shared folders
beforehand.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 368)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
●You can only specify one destination at a time.
1Place the document(s). Placing Documents(P. 41)
2Press and tap <Scan>.
3Tap <File>.
4Select a destination from the Address Book.
●For instructions on how to use the Address Book, see Specifying from Address Book(P. 273) .
Using the Machine as a Scanner
253
●Selecting destinations directly by entering coded dial numbers. You can also specify previously used
destinations.
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial Numbers(P. 276)
Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 281)
5Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Tap the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 258)
●The le name of a scanned document is automatically assigned based on the following format:
"communication management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three
digits).le extension name."
Example of le names: If a one-page document is converted into a PDF le and sent on October 17, 2015
at 07:00:05 P.M.
"0045_151017190005_001.pdf"
●You cannot specify le names yourself.
6Press to start scanning.
➠Scanning of the document starts.
●To cancel scanning, tap <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)
(P. 256)
When placing documents in the feeder in step 1
When scanning is complete, the documents are scanned to the shared folder.
When placing documents on the platen glass in step 1
When scanning is complete, follow the procedures below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format in step 5).
1If there are additional pages of documents to be scanned, place the next document on the platen glass,
and press .
●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.
●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.
2Tap <Start TX>.
➠The documents are scanned to the shared folder.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
254
●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing Default Settings(P. 284)
LINKS
Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 286)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
255
Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)
1469-04S
If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after pressing , tap <Cancel> on the display or press .
You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.
◼Use <Cancel> to Cancel
◼Press to Cancel
If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When Is Pressed
Documents have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
256
◼Check the Transmission Status before Canceling
<TX Job> <Job Status> Select the document <Cancel> <Yes>
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 286)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
257
Specifying Detailed Settings
1469-04U
This section describes the settings available when scanning documents. These settings include specifying the le
format into which documents are converted and adjusting density to improve the appearance of scanned documents
as well as the basic settings such as specifying the document orientation or scanning size.
Specifying a Scanning Size(P. 260) Setting Color Mode(P. 261) Selecting a File Format(P. 262)
Adjusting Density(P. 264) Specifying Orientation of Your
Document(P. 265)
Selecting Document Type(P. 266)
Scanning 2-Sided
Documents (MF249dw)(P. 267)
Adjusting Sharpness(P. 268) Adjusting Balance between File
Size and Image Quality(P. 270)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
258
Setting Gamma Values(P. 271)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
259
Specifying a Scanning Size
1469-04W
You can specify the scanning size of your documents.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Scan Size> Select the document size
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
260
Setting Color Mode
1469-04X
You can specify whether to scan documents in color or black and white.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Color Mode> Select the color mode
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
261
Selecting a File Format
1469-04Y
You can select the le format to which documents are scanned, from PDF/JPEG/TIFF.
For PDF, you can select a highly compressed PDF le with a reduced le size.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <File Format> Select a le format
<PDF>
Converts a scanned document into a PDF le with no le size reduction.
<PDF (Compact)>
Converts a scanned document into a PDF le with a reduced le size than that of <PDF>.
<JPEG>
The scanned document is converted into a JPEG le.
<TIFF>
The scanned document is converted into a TIFF le.
●If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan a document from the platen glass, you can only scan one
page. To scan a multiple-page document all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the document is saved as a
separate le. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page documents either from the platen glass or
from the feeder and the whole of the scanned document is saved as one le.
●<PDF (Compact)> compresses photos and illustrations on documents more than <PDF>. The le will be
smaller, but the image quality of some documents or the number of documents that can be scanned at once
may be lower.
●For the resolutions of each le format, see Specications for Scanning to Shared Folders (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 657) .
LINKS
Using the Machine as a Scanner
262
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
263
Adjusting Density
1469-050
You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in a document are too
light or dark.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
<->
Decreases the density.
<+>
Increases the density.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Adjusting Sharpness(P. 268)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
264
Specifying Orientation of Your Document
1469-051
You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Original Orientation> Select the
document type
<Portrait>
Select for documents with portrait orientation.
<Landscape>
Select for documents with landscape orientation.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
265
Selecting Document Type
1469-052
You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the document type, such
as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Original Type> Select the document type
<Text>
Suitable when scanning documents that only contain text.
<Text/Photo>
Suitable when scanning documents that contain both text and photos.
<Photo>
Suitable when scanning documents that contain printed photos, such as magazines or pamphlets.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
266
Scanning 2-Sided Documents
1469-053
The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of documents in the
feeder.
●The machine cannot scan both sides of documents automatically when the documents are placed on the
platen glass.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or
<Calendar Type>
<Book Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.
<Calendar Type>
Select for documents whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
267
Adjusting Sharpness
1469-054
You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen
blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of
magazine photos.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness
<Apply>
<->
Decreases the sharpness, resulting in a softer image.
Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos
<+>
Increases the image sharpness.
Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil
Using the Machine as a Scanner
268
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Adjusting Density(P. 264)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
269
Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality
1469-055
You can specify the le compression ratio when converting scanned documents into
the JPEG format. <Small: Memory Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than
normal to create smaller les with lower image quality. On the other hand, <Large:
Image Quality Priority> makes the compression ratio lower than normal larger les
with higher image quality.
<Scan> Specify a destination with <E-Mail>/<File> <Data Size> Specify the setting
<Small: Memory Priority>
The data size is highly compressed and reduced, but the image quality becomes low.
<Standard>
The compression ratio and the image quality are adjusted to an intermediate setting between <Small:
Memory Priority> and <Large: Image Quality Priority>.
<Large: Image Quality Priority>
The image quality improves, but the data compression ratio decreased and data size becomes large.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Selecting a File Format(P. 262)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
270
Setting Gamma Values
1469-056
The scanned documents are converted into the specied le formats. At that time,
you can specify the gamma values to apply to the documents. You can specify the
same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the
converted les so the les are displayed with brightness true to the original
documents.
●For the gamma value of a monitor display, see the instruction manual included with the display.
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Output File Image Settings> <YCbCr TX Gamma Value> Select
the gamma value
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Selecting a File Format(P. 262)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
271
Sending Using Registered Destinations (E-Mail/Shared
Folder)
1469-057
You can specify destinations by selecting from the Address Book as well as by using the numeric keys. To use the
Address Book, you need to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. You can also specify previously used
destinations.
Specifying from Address
Book(P. 273)
Selecting Destinations Directly
by Entering Coded Dial
Numbers(P. 276)
Specifying Destinations with the
One-Touch Buttons(P. 279)
Specifying Previously Used
Destinations(P. 281)
TIPS for Enhancing Security
●If you want to limit available destinations to ones from the Address Book or previously specied ones:
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
●If you want to disable specifying previously used destinations: Disabling Use of Previously Used
Destinations(P. 419)
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
272
Specifying from Address Book
1469-058
The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of
registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient
names.
●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering in the
Address Book(P. 60)
●To register shared folders as destinations, you need to perform the registration procedure from the
computer.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 368)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
1Press and tap <Scan>.
2Tap <E-Mail> or <File>.
●If you select <File>, proceed to step 4.
3Select <Destination> <Specify from Address Book>.
●If the <Type> screen appears, select <To>, <Cc>, or <Bcc> as a destination type.
4Select a tab using / .
Using the Machine as a Scanner
273
<All>
Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.
< >
Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed.
<A-Z>/<0-9>/<ABC> to <YZ>
Displays destinations with recipient names whose rst characters correspond to the characters of the
selected tab.
<>
Displays destinations for faxes. Do not use in this procedure. To specify destinations using this tab, see
Specifying from Address Book(P. 121) .
< >
Displays destinations for e-mails.
< >
Displays destinations for shared folders.
<>
Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial. This feature is not available when scanning
documents to shared folders.
5Select a destination.
If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail)
●Repeat steps 3 to 5. Up to 50 destinations can be specied.
To delete destinations (e-mail)
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
274
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
●If you select Group Dial in step 2, <Number of Destinations> is displayed. Tapping this item displays
destinations registered in the group.
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
●Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
275
Selecting Destinations Directly by Entering Coded Dial
Numbers
1469-059
Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address
Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.
●To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 61)
●To register shared folders as destinations, you need to perform the registration procedure from the
computer.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 368)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
1Press and tap <Scan>.
2Tap <E-Mail> or <File>.
3Select <Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial>.
If <E-Mail> is selected at step 2
●If the <Type> screen appears, select <To>, <Cc>, or <Bcc> as a destination type.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
276
If <File> is selected at step 2
4Use the numeric keys to enter a three-digit number (001 to 100).
●If you enter the wrong characters, press . (Press to delete each character one by one; press and hold to
delete all the input characters at once.)
If a conrmation screen appears
●When <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the
destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the group name and the number of
destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, tap <OK>. To specify a different
destination, tap <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying Destinations
in Address Book(P. 420)
If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail)
●Repeat steps 2 and 3. Up to 50 destinations can be specied.
To delete destinations (e-mail)
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
●If you select Group Dial in step 2, <Number of Destinations> is displayed. Tapping this item displays
destinations registered in the group.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
277
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
●Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
278
Specifying Destinations with the One-Touch Buttons
1469-05A
Tap one-touch buttons in the <Home> Screen to specify destinations.
You need to register destinations before using one-touch dialing.
Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial(P. 65)
1Press and tap any one of <One-Touch 1> to <One-Touch 4>.
If a conrmation screen appears
If <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a conrmation screen appears with the
destination and destination name registered to the one-touch button (if a destination registered for Group
Dial, the group name and number of destinations appears). Conrm the destinations are correct, and tap
<OK>. If destinations are incorrect, tap <Cancel> and tap the one-touch buttons again. Checking
Destinations before Sending Documents(P. 420)
Selecting several destinations
Destinations can be added from the Address Book, coded dial numbers, One-Touch, and Recall Settings. Tap
<Destination>.
2Specify the scanning settings as necessary.
●Select the settings. Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 258)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
279
3Press to start sending.
●Scanning starts.
●If you want to cancel sending, press Tap <Yes>.
To delete destinations
If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove> <Yes>.
●If you specied Group Dial in step 2, "destination(s)" is displayed. Tapping <Number of Destinations>
displays destinations registered in the group.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
280
Specifying Previously Used Destinations
1469-05C
You can select a destination from among the past three destinations. When you
specify a previously used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings
such as density you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.
●When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of
Previously Used Destinations(P. 419)
●Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and
disables this feature. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
●When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specied are
deleted.
1Press and tap <Scan>.
2Tap <E-Mail> or <File>.
3Select <Destination> <Recall Set.>.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
281
If <E-Mail> is selected at step 2
If <File> is selected at step 2
4Select a destination.
●When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed
in the log, but all the destinations are specied.
➠The selected destination and its scan settings are specied. You can also change the settings before
sending.
To delete destinations (e-mail)
When you transmitted to multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.
1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.
2Select a destination you want to delete.
3Tap <Remove>.
●If you select Group Dial in step 2, <Number of Destinations> is displayed. Tapping this item displays
destinations registered in the group.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
282
4Tap <Yes>.
If you want to easily and quickly delete destinations without displaying a list of
destinations
●Before tapping <Destination> in step 1, you can tap / to toggle the destinations you specied.
Display a destination you want to delete, and press .
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
283
Changing Default Settings
1469-05E
The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If
you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to
congure the same settings every time you scan.
◼E-Mail
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting
Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
◼Shared Folder
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <File Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting
Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>
Using the Machine as a Scanner
284
Settings
Select the item you want to set, and change the default value.
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 258)
Scan Settings(P. 508)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
285
Checking Status and Log for Sent Documents (E-Mail/
Shared Folder)
1469-05F
You can check the status and log for scanned documents sent directly from the machine.
●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the logs for sent documents. Display Job Log
(P. 533)
1Press .
2Tap <TX Job>.
3Check the statuses and logs for sent documents.
To check the statuses for sent documents
1Tap <Job Status>.
2Select the document whose status you want to check.
<TX Job Status>
Displays a list of the documents that are being sent or are waiting to be processed.
Using the Machine as a Scanner
286
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list. If you specied multiple
destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the screen. To check the details of
specied multiple destinations, tap <Destination>.
To check the logs for sent documents
1Tap <Job Log>.
2Select the document whose log you want to check.
<TX Job Log>
Displays a list of the documents that were sent. <OK> is displayed when a document was sent
successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document failed to be sent because it was canceled or
there was some error.
<Details>
Displays detailed information about the document selected from the list.
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
●This number represents an error code. When an Error Code Appears(P. 559)
LINKS
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Canceling Sending Documents (E-Mail/Shared Folder)(P. 256)
TX Result Report(P. 609)
Communication Management Report(P. 612)
Using the Machine as a Scanner
287
Can Be Used Conveniently with a
Mobile Device
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device ........................................................................ 289
Connecting to a Mobile Device ......................................................................................................................... 290
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw) ........................................................... 291
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications ...................................................................... 294
Using AirPrint ............................................................................................................................................... 295
Printing with AirPrint ............................................................................................................................. 300
Scanning with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................... 303
Faxing with AirPrint ............................................................................................................................... 305
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ..................................................................................................................... 307
Using Google Cloud Print ............................................................................................................................. 308
Managing the Machine Remotely .................................................................................................................... 312
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
288
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
1469-05H
Combining the machine with a mobile device such as a smartphone or tablet enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing, scan, or other operation with ease. You can also use a mobile device to operate the
machine remotely, check the printing status, and change machine's settings.
Connecting to a Mobile Device(P. 290)
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing Applications(P. 294)
Managing the Machine Remotely(P. 312)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
289
Connecting to a Mobile Device
1469-05J
When connecting the machine to a mobile device, you can select whether to connect via a wireless LAN router or
Direct Connection. Select the connection method that best suits your environment and devices.
◼Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router
Like when connecting a computer and the machine, connect a mobile device and the machine via a wireless LAN
router. For how to connect your mobile device and wireless LAN, see the instruction manual for the device or contact
your manufacturer.
Connect the machine to the router with a wired LAN or wireless LAN. Connecting to a Network(P. 315)
◼Making Direct Connection
Connect the mobile device and the machine directly without using a wireless LAN router. Even where no wireless LAN
environment is available, you can quickly connect the machine and a mobile device. You can also congure the
machine to exit Direct Connection mode automatically once a certain period of time elapses after the machine enters
Direct Connection mode and switch to a wireless LAN connection. Make Direct Connection (Access Point
Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 291)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
290
Make Direct Connection (Access Point
Mode)
1469-05K
Even in an environment without wireless LAN router, you can connect your mobile device and the machine without
going through dicult settings when you use "Access Point Mode," which allows you to wirelessly and directly connect
your mobile device to the machine.
Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)
Follow these steps to establish a connection using Access Point Mode.
Put the machine into Access Point Mode.
●Set <Use Direct Connection> to <On>.
Use Direct Connection(P. 475)
If connected to the network by wireless LAN
A screen for selecting the Direct Connection method is displayed.
<Direct Connection Only>
Connection by wireless LAN becomes unavailable. Set when only using Direct
Connection.
<Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)>
A wireless LAN connection is disconnected only when using Direct Connection. Set
when wishing to switch between Direct Connection and connection by wireless
LAN.
Put the machine into a connection waiting state.
●In the <Home> screen, tap <Direct Conn>. The machine enters the state in which you
can connect your mobile device to the machine.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
291
Connecting from a mobile device
●Based on the SSID and network key displayed in the display, make wireless LAN
connection settings for connecting to the machine.
●The screen below appears in the display during the connection process.
<Conn. Info>
You can view the information on the Direct Connection being proceeding.
<Disconnect>
Stops the Direct Connection procedure. When printing, scanning, or other
desired operation is complete, tap this button to terminate the connection.
●When the machine is in Direct Connection mode, it is possible that you cannot connect to the Internet
depending on your mobile device.
●If <Use Custom SSID> is <Off> when the machine is in Direct Connection mode, only a single device can be
connected at a time.
●If wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and network
key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
●If while in communication by Direct Connection, a duration when there is no data transmission between the
machine and the mobile device lasts for some time, the communication may terminate.
●The machine's SSID and network key are changed each time the Direct Connection procedure is started.
●While in Direct Connection, sleep mode is not as effective at saving power.
●If you use the Direct Connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the Direct Connection.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
292
Setting an arbitrary SSID and network key
●You can enter and set the SSID and network key used for Direct Connection yourself. Setting any SSID allows
up to 5 devices to connect to the machine at the same time. Access Point Mode Settings (P. 475)
Exiting from Direct Connection mode automatically
●You can also congure the machine to exit Direct Connection mode automatically once a certain period of
time elapses after the machine enters Direct Connection mode. If <Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)>
is specied as the connection method in Direct Connection mode, the machine connects to a wireless LAN
automatically after exiting Direct Connection mode.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 317)
Time Until Direct Connection Termination (P. 475)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
293
Making the Best Use of the Machine by Utilizing
Applications
1469-05L
You can use an appropriate application that enables you to perform printing, scanning, or other operation by
operating the machine from your mobile device. The machine supports a dedicated application from Canon and
various other applications. You can select the most appropriate application to your mobile device, the purpose, the
situation, and so on.
◼Printing/Scanning via Canon PRINT Business
You can print from mobile devices that support iOS/Android, and place and scan originals with the machine, then send
to a mobile device. When printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on
supported operating systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/).
◼Printing with Canon Print Service
You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
◼Using Google Cloud Print
You can print from an application or service that supports Google Cloud Print. You can print by remotely operating the
machine at any time and from anywhere, for example even while you are on the go. Using Google Cloud
Print(P. 308)
◼Printing with Mopria™
This machine also supports Mopria™. Using Mopria™ allows you to print with printers of different models from
different manufacturers by using common operations and common settings. For example, assume that Mopria™
compatible printers of different models from different manufacturers are installed in your oce, at your place, or at
places you are visiting. You can then print with any of those printers by using Mopria™ without the need to install the
respective dedicated applications on them. For details about the models supporting Mopria™ and the system
requirements, see http://www.mopria.org.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
294
Using AirPrint
1469-05R
You can print, scan, or fax without using drivers by sending print data from Apple devices.
AirPrint settings
Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 295)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 298)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 300)
Scanning with AirPrint(P. 303)
Faxing with AirPrint(P. 305)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 307)
Conguring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
●If you are using a mobile device, such as iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3Click [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
295
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the required settings, and click [OK].
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]/[Location]/[Speed/Image Quality Priority]/[Latitude]/[Longitude]
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
296
Enter the name and the installation location information to help you identify this machine when operating
your Apple device. This information is useful if you have more than one AirPrint printer. Also select whether
to give priority to print speed or to print quality.
If you select the [Use AirPrint] check box
The following items are also set to <On> automatically.
●<mDNS Settings> for IPv4 and IPv6 Conguring DNS(P. 377)
●<Use HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
●[Use IPP Printing] under [IPP Print Settings] Changing the Setting of Functions Available with
AirPrint(P. 297)
●<Use Network Link Scan> Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 297)
If you change [Printer Name]
●If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because <mDNS Name>
( Conguring DNS(P. 377) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the
Mac again.
◼Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint
If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the
necessary setting using the operation panel or Remote UI.
Changing Print and Fax Settings
To perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.
Turning the function On/Off
You can specify whether to perform printing and fax sending with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].
Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote
UI(P. 450) ) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPP Print
Settings] [Edit] Clear or select the [Use IPP Printing] check box [OK]
Changing the TLS setting
You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing or sending faxes with
AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].
●When the machine is connected to a Mac via USB, set [Use TLS] to [Off].
Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote
UI(P. 450) ) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [IPP Print
Settings] [Edit] Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
297
Changing Scan Settings
To perform scanning with AirPrint, Network Link Scan is used.
Turning the function On/Off
You can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <TCP/IP Settings> <Network Link Scan Settings> <Use
Network Link Scan> Select <Off> or <On>
Changing the TLS setting
You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing scanning with AirPrint. The
factory default setting is [On].
●When the machine is connected to a Mac via USB, set [Use TLS] to [Off].
Log on to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote
UI(P. 450) ) [Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Network Link
Scan Settings] [Edit] Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge. Further, you can congure security function
settings ( Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) ).
1Click [System Preferences] in the Dock on the desktop [Printers & Scanners].
2Select this machine and click [Options & Supplies].
3Click [Show Printer Webpage].
4Log on to the Remote UI.
●To change AirPrint settings, log on in System Manager Mode.
➠The screen for AirPrint is displayed.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
298
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
299
Printing with AirPrint
1469-05S
You do not necessarily need to use a computer for printing e-mails, photos, Web pages, and other documents. AirPrint
enables you to print directly from Apple devices such as iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch.
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 300)
Printing from Mac(P. 301)
System Requirements
To print with AirPrint, you need one of the following Apple devices.
●iPad (all models)
●iPhone (3GS or later)
●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
* OS X 10.9 or later when you use USB connection.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
●The Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
●The Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection.
●The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
●For printing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions Available
with AirPrint(P. 297)
Printing from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Apple
device.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
●For how to make sure whether the Apple device and the machine are in Direct Connection, see Make
Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 291) .
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
300
2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.
3From the drop-down list, tap [Print].
4Select this machine from [Printer] in [Printer Options].
●The printers connected to the network are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
●[Printer Options] is not displayed on applications that do not support AirPrint. You cannot print by using
those applications.
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
●You can specify the halftones setting for image les using the operation panel. Mobile Print
Halftones(P. 514)
6Tap [Print].
➠Printing starts.
Checking the print status
●During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].
Printing from Mac
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to your Mac.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
●This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for another operation.
3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
4Select this machine in the print dialog box.
●The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
301
5Specify the print settings as necessary.
●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
●You can specify the halftones setting for image les using the operation panel. Mobile Print
Halftones(P. 514)
6Click [Print].
➠Printing starts.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
302
Scanning with AirPrint
1469-05U
You can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.
System Requirements
To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
●The Mac and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
●The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
●For scanning, it is required to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>. Changing the Setting of Functions
Available with AirPrint(P. 297)
●Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function ( Auto
Online for Remote Scan(P. 532) ) is set to <Off>, rst put the machine into online state by tapping <Scan>
<Remote Scanner>, then start the procedure for scanning.
●You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing an
operation whatsoever.
Scanning from the Mac
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to the Mac.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
2Add the machine to your Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
●This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for another operation.
3Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
4Click [Scan].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
303
5Click [Open Scanner].
➠The [Scanner] screen is displayed.
6Congure the scan settings as necessary.
7Click [Scan].
➠Scanning starts, and scanned data is displayed.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
304
Faxing with AirPrint
1469-05W
AirPrint enables you to send faxes from a Mac in almost the same way as when you print from a Mac.
System Requirements
To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.
Network Environment
You need one of the following environments.
●The Mac and the machine are connected to the same LAN.
●The Mac and the machine are connected via USB.
●For faxing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions Available
with AirPrint(P. 297)
Faxing from Mac
1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and that it is connected to the Mac.
●For how to make sure of this, see "Getting Started." Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
2Add the machine to your Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].
●This operation is not necessary if the registration has already been performed for another operation.
3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual for the application you are using.
4Select this machine in the print dialog box.
➠The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step.
5Specify the destination.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
305
6Click [Fax].
➠Fax sending starts.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
306
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
1469-05X
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
●For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and the machine has sucient toner cartridge
remaining. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 298)
●For scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is <On>. Changing the Setting of
Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 297)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
307
Using Google Cloud Print
1469-05Y
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user who has a Google account to print from applications compatible
with Google Cloud Print via a smartphone, tablet, or computer connected to the Internet. Unlike conventional printing
from a computer, Google Cloud Print enables you to print without using a printer driver. For example, if you want to
print an e-mail or les that are attached to an e-mail, you can print just by using an application compatible with Google
Cloud Print. You will nd your printouts when you go to the machine.
Checking the Machine Settings(P. 308)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 308)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 309)
●When registering the machine or when using Google Cloud Print to print documents, you must be able to
connect the machine to the Internet. You are also responsible for paying all Internet connection fees.
●You may not be able to use this function in some countries or regions.
●Google Cloud Print does not support printing from IPv6 addresses.
●To use Google Cloud Print, a Google account is required. If you do not have one, access Google website to
create your account.
Checking the Machine Settings
Before setting up Google Cloud Print, check the following:
●Make sure that the machine is assigned an IPv4 address and connected to a computer over a network.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
●Make sure that the date and time and the time zone settings are correct. Date/Time Settings(P. 489)
Changing Google Cloud Print Settings
Enable the Google Cloud Print function of the machine. You can also disable the Google Cloud Print function of the
machine.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> screen.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
308
●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap
<Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Google Cloud Print Settings> <Enable Google Cloud Print>.
4Tap <On> or <Off>.
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print allows you to print from anywhere.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
309
4Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
If [Register] is unavailable
●You need to enable Google Cloud Print. Click [Edit], select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box, and
then click [OK].
To reregister the machine
●To reregister the machine if the owner of the machine has changed or for other reasons, unregister the
machine and register it again.
5Click the link of the URL displayed for [URL for Registration].
6Follow the on-screen instructions to register the machine.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
310
➠You can print from a Google Cloud Print compatible application such as Google Chrome™.
●Access the Google Cloud Print website for information about the latest applications that support Google
Cloud Print.
Registering from a mobile device or Google Chrome
●You can also register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome*. The machine's display shows
the following conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Tap <Yes> to complete the
registration.
* For the registration procedure, see the instruction manual for your mobile device or the Google Cloud Print website.
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
311
Managing the Machine Remotely
1469-060
You can use the Remote UI from a Web browser installed on your mobile device. This allows you to check the
machine's status and specify machine's settings from your mobile device. Note that the Remote UI screen may not be
displayed properly for some devices and environments.
Starting Remote UI with a Mobile Device
Enter the IP address of the machine into the Web browser and start the Remote UI. Check the IP address set to the
machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 344) ). If you have any questions, ask your Network
Administrator.
1Start the Web browser on your mobile device.
2Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
●Some items of the Remote UI are not displayed in its "Smartphone Version." If you want to check all items,
see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Using Remote UI (P. 449)
Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device
312
Network
Network .............................................................................................................................................................. 314
Connecting to a Network .................................................................................................................................. 315
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw) ....................................................................... 317
Connecting to a Wired LAN ........................................................................................................................... 318
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw) .................................................................................. 319
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ........................................................................... 321
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ................................................................................ 323
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ........................................................................... 326
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings .......................................................................... 329
Checking the SSID and Network Key ...................................................................................................... 333
Setting IP Addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 336
Setting IPv4 Address .............................................................................................................................. 337
Setting IPv6 Addresses .......................................................................................................................... 340
Viewing Network Settings ................................................................................................................................ 344
Conguring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a Computer ................................................................ 347
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ...................................................................................... 348
Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................. 351
Setting Up Print Server ................................................................................................................................. 354
Conguring Scan Settings (E-Mail/Shared Folders) (MF249dw / MF247dw) ................................................... 357
Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail) .................................................................................................. 358
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings .......................................................................................................... 359
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings ......................................................................................... 363
Conguring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders ............................................................................ 367
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ............................................................................................ 368
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................. 372
Conguring Ethernet Settings ...................................................................................................................... 373
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit .................................................................................................. 375
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network ......................................................................................... 376
Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 377
Conguring SMB (MF249dw / MF247dw) ...................................................................................................... 382
Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 384
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP .................................................................................... 386
Network
313
Network
1469-061
The machine has been designed for exibility of use across a variety of environments, and it includes advanced
technologies in addition to basic network features. Do not worry if you are not a network expert, because the machine
has also been designed for convenience and ease of use. Relax and proceed with the network setup one step at a time.
◼Connecting to a Computer/Viewing the Machine's Network Settings
Connecting to a Network(P. 315) Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
◼Conguring or Preparing for Print/PC Fax/Scan Functions
Conguring the Machine for Printing or Faxing
from a Computer(P. 347)
Conguring Scan Settings (E-Mail/Shared Folders)
(MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 357)
◼Customizing the Machine for More Convenient Network Experience
Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 372)
Direct Connection to a mobile device (MF249dw / MF247dw)
●You can directly communicate with the machine from your mobile device without the need to congure
dicult network settings. Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 291)
Network
314
Connecting to a Network
1469-062
When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For steps to connect the machine and set an IP address, see "Getting Started" ( Manuals Included with the
Machine(P. 659) ). For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
●The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.
●The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
●For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
◼Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
●Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
●Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
●Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the
communication method (half-duplex/full-duplex) or the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/
100BASE-TX) ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 373) ). For more information,
contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 345)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 345)
Network
315
●To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X
Authentication(P. 429) .
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 317)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
●Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Set the IP address as necessary.
●This step is required when you want to assign a specic IP address to the machine or
change the dynamic IP addressing protocol from the default DHCP.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 336)
Network
316
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
1469-063
After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. For how to connect to and specify settings for a wireless LAN/wired LAN, see "Getting
Started" ( Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659) ). Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to
<Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you will need to uninstall MF Drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them.
For more information, see "MF Driver Installation Guide."
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4Tap <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Connecting to a Network(P. 315)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Network
317
Connecting to a Wired LAN
1469-064
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1Connect a LAN cable.
●Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2Wait approximately 2 minutes.
●While you wait, the IP address is set automatically.
You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 336)
LINKS
Connecting to a Network(P. 315)
Network
318
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
1469-065
Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 319)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 320)
Risk of information leak
Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
The wireless LAN security that is supported by the machine is listed below. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer.
●128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
●WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
●WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
●The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
●The wireless router must conform to IEEE 802.11b/g/n and be able to communicate in 2.4 GHz frequency
band. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact your
manufacturer.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
Network
319
◼Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 321)
◼PIN Code Mode
Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 323)
If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333) ).
◼Selecting a Wireless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
◼Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
LINKS
Connecting to a Network(P. 315)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 317)
Network
320
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
1469-066
If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking
device for help.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
●If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
4Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
5Tap <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6Tap <Yes>.
7Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after tapping <Yes> in step 6.
Network
321
●Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close> and return to step 5.
8Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the
strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 474)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Network
322
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
1469-067
If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your networking
device for help.
From a Computer
1Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
●For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
3Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
4Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
●If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
5Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
6Tap <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
7Tap <Yes>.
Network
323
●A PIN code is generated.
From a Computer
8Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
●Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.
●The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after tapping <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close> and return to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the
strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Network
324
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 474)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Network
325
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
1469-068
You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or TKIP. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333) ).
Security settings
If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to select
<Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up the
connection using the manual entry method ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 329) ).
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
●If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
4Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
5Tap <SSID Settings>.
6Tap <Select Access Point>.
●The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.
Network
326
If <Cannot nd the access point.> is displayed
See When an Error Message Appears(P. 549) .
7Select a wireless LAN router.
●Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down.
If your wireless router is not found
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/
Settings Problems(P. 566)
8Enter the network key that you have written down.
●Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Entering Text(P. 38)
WEP WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
9Tap <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.
10 Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
Network
327
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the
strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 474)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Network
328
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
1469-069
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333) ).
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
●If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
4Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
5Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.
6Enter the SSID that you have written down.
●Enter the SSID using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text(P. 38)
7Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
●If you do not need to specify the security settings, tap <None>.
Network
329
Using WEP
1Tap <WEP>.
2Select an authentication method.
<Open System>
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3Tap <Edit WEP Key>.
4Select the WEP key(1 to 4) you want to edit.
●Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
5Enter the network key that you have written down.
●Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text(P. 38)
6Tap <Select WEP Key>.
Network
330
7Tap the WEP key you have edited.
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1Tap <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3Enter the network key that you have written down.
●Enter the network key using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text(P. 38)
8Tap <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
Tap <Close>, check whether the specied settings are correct, and return to step 5.
9Check that the Wi-Fi indicator is blinking on the operation panel.
●The Wi-Fi indicator blinks when a wireless router is detected.
Network
331
●When the setup is completed, the screen below is displayed, and approximately 2 seconds later, the Wi-Fi
indicator lights up.
●Wait approximately 2 minutes until the IP address settings of the machine are completed.
Signal strength
When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device with the
strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
Reducing power consumption
You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Power Save Mode (P. 474)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Network
332
Checking the SSID and Network Key
1469-06A
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID A name given for identifying a specic wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key
A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security
Protocols
(Authentication/
Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
●Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
●Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
●Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
◼Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer
The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check
them by using the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant included with the provided DVD-ROM. The Canon MF/LBP
Wireless Setup Assistant can be used on a computer connected to a wireless LAN.
If you are a Mac OS user
The provided DVD-ROM that comes with the machine does not contain the Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup
Assistant for Mac OS. It is available from the following Canon Web site: http://www.canon.com/
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
Network
333
●If the above screen is not displayed Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup]
Screen(P. 668)
●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3Click [Start] for [Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant].
4Read the License Agreement and click [Yes] to agree.
Network
334
5Check the information displayed for the wireless router.
●Write down the necessary information. If you do not know what information is necessary, write down all the
information that is displayed.
If wireless routers are not found
Click [Refresh]. If nothing happens, check that the settings are correctly congured on the computer and the
wireless router.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
Network
335
Setting IP Addresses
1469-06C
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.
Network
336
Setting IPv4 Address
1469-06E
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318) ). You can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 337)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 339)
Setting IPv4 Address
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.
4Congure IP address settings.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via a protocol such as DHCP. When <Auto Acquire: On> is
displayed, automatic addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this
option, <Auto Acquire> must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1Select <Auto Acquire> <Select Protocol>.
Network
337
2Tap <DHCP>, <BOOTP>, or <RARP>.
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP>, <BOOTP>, or <RARP> when these services are unavailable, the
machine will waste time and communications resources searching the network for these services.
3Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
●If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4Tap <Apply>.
IP addresses assigned via DHCP/BOOTP/RARP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1Check that <Auto Acquire> is set to <Off>.
●If <On> is displayed, tap <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.
2Tap <Manually Acquire>.
3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
●Specify the settings in the following order: <IP Address> <Subnet Mask> <Gateway Address>.
●Enter each setting using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Network
338
Checking whether the settings are correct
Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ). If
a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel ( Testing the
Network Connection(P. 339) ).
Testing the Network Connection
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.
4Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and tap <Apply>.
●If a proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown above.
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 340)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
Network
339
Setting IPv6 Addresses
1469-06F
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4
Settings(P. 344) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not
available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use up to nine of the following
IPv6 addresses:
Type Maximum
number
available
Description
Link-local address 1 An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to
communicate with devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set
when the IPv6 function of the machine is enabled.
Manual address 1 An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex
length and default router address.
Stateless address 6 An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine
and the network prex that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are
discarded when the machine is restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address 1 An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
340
4Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.
Network
341
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Use Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be entered.
[Prex Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6Click [OK].
Network
342
Checking whether the settings are correct
Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
Using the operation panel
IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. IPv6 Settings(P. 477)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 337)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
Network
343
Viewing Network Settings
1469-06H
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 344)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 344)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 345)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 345)
●The IP address is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
●Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 376)
●You can print a list of the current network settings. User Data List(P. 620)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view
Network
344
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN (MF249dw /
MF247dw)
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Wireless LAN Settings>.
●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
●If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, tap <Yes>.
4Read the message that is displayed, and tap <OK>.
5Tap <Wireless LAN Information>.
6Select the setting to view.
Network
345
Viewing WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information
1Tap <Security Settings>.
2Conrm and tap the current security setting.
●If the security settings are not congured, <None> is displayed.
3Select the setting to view.
WEP WPA/WPA2-PSK
●<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from . Press
<Network Information> <Network Connection Method> and select the setting to view.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 337)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 340)
Conguring DNS(P. 377)
Network
346
Conguring the Machine for Printing or Faxing from a
Computer
1469-06J
When using the machine as a network printer or a PC-to-fax machine, you can congure the protocols and ports used
for printing and create a print server for the machine. Before conguring the machine for printing or faxing from a
computer, perform the basic setup procedures, including the printer driver installation. For more information, see "MF
Driver Installation Guide."
●Printing protocols are rules for delivering document data created on a computer to the machine, and can be
selected according to the printing purpose or the network environment.
●Ports are gateways for passing document data from a computer to the printer. Incorrect port settings are
often the cause when documents cannot be printed from a network computer.
Network
347
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
1469-06K
Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer. The protocols supported
by the machine include LPD, RAW, and WSD (Web Services on Devices).
To change protocols' port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers (P. 409) .
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure printing protocols.
Network
348
Conguring LPD or RAW
1Click [Edit] in [LPD Print Settings] or [RAW Print Settings].
2Congure the settings as necessary.
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
3Click [OK].
Conguring WSD
1Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].
2Congure the settings as necessary.
Network
349
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use WSD Scanning]
Available for Windows Vista/7/8/10, WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without
installing the scanner driver. Select the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD
scanning, clear the check box.
[Use Computer Scanning]
Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check
box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, tap
<Scan> and specify a WSD-connected computer as a scan destination. ( Scanning from the
Machine(P. 234) ).
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the
network.
3Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
●LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
LPD Print Settings(P. 479)
RAW Print Settings(P. 479)
WSD Settings(P. 479)
Setting up WSD network devices on Windows Vista/7/8/10
●The WSD printer and scanner can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying
the Printer Folder(P. 667) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions.
For more information about how to install MF Drivers for the WSD network printer, see "MF Driver
Installation Guide."
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 351)
Network
350
Conguring Printer Ports
1469-06L
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the
computer.
To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).
3Click the [Ports] tab and congure the required settings.
Network
351
Adding a port
If the IP address of the machine has been changed, add a new port. Adding a port is also an effective solution
when an incorrect port type was selected in the Windows printer folder during the printer driver installation.
1Click [Add Port].
2Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3Click [Auto Detect], select the machine when it is detected, and click [Next].
If the machine is not detected
Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, click [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or MAC
address of the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 344) ), and then click [Next].
Network
352
4Click [Add] [Finish].
5Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing protocols ( Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 348) ) or port numbers
( Changing Port Numbers (P. 409) ) have been changed on the machine, the corresponding settings on
the computer must also be congured. This change is only available for LPR or RAW ports.
1Click [Congure Port].
2Click the [LPR] or [RAW] radio button in [Protocol Type], change the number in the [Port Number] text box
as necessary, and then click [OK].
4Click [Close].
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 354)
Network
353
Setting Up Print Server
1469-06R
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also enables each
computer to install MF Drivers over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers on each
computer by using the provided DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server, congure the
settings for sharing the printer.
●To perform the following procedure, log on to your computer with an administrator account.
●You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
●When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
To obtain device information when using a print server
●Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be added during the printer driver installation. For more
information, see "MF Driver Installation Guide."
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click your printer icon and click [Printer properties] (or [Properties]).
3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
Network
354
When [Change Sharing Options] is displayed
Click [Change Sharing Options]. If the [User Account Control] dialog box appears, click [Yes] (or [Continue]).
4Install additional drivers as necessary.
●This operation is required if you want to install MF Drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
1Click [Additional Drivers].
2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
●Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Network
355
Print server Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems [x64]
64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]
If you do not know whether your Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012 is a 32-bit or 64-bit
operating system, see Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 670) .
3Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder that
contains MF Drivers, and then click [OK].
* Specify the folder for your language in [xxxx].
●If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] or [PCL] [XXXX]* [x64]
[Driver] folders on the provided DVD-ROM.
●If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] or [PCL] [XXXX]* [32bit]
[Driver] folders on the provided DVD-ROM.
4Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
5Click [OK].
◼Installing MF Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P. 668)
2Double-click the shared printer.
3Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
LINKS
Printing from a Computer(P. 190)
Network
356
Conguring Scan Settings (E-Mail/Shared Folders)
1469-06S
To send scanned originals directly by e-mail or save them to shared folders, you need to congure the network. The
Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you with the required setup. Set
the necessary conguration depending on your purpose and network environment.
Scanning to E-Mail
Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 358)
Scanning to Shared Folders
Conguring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders(P. 367)
LINKS
Specications for E-Mail Sending and Receiving (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 656)
Specications for Scanning to Shared Folders (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 657)
Network
357
Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)
1469-06U
Before conguring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup ow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
Make sure that you have the following information:
●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
●An e-mail address to be registered as a destination.
●Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port
numbers, whether authentication is required, and the user name and password
for authentication.
●For more information about the e-mail server settings, contact your Internet
service provider or Network Administrator.
Make sure that the computer meets the following system requirements for the
Send Setting Tool(sending e-mail):
●Operating system
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012
●Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later
●Display
SVGA monitor (with at least 800 x 600 pixel screen resolution) that supports at
least 256 colors
●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
Disabling Remote UI (P. 424)
Set the machine conguration.
●Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 359)
●Conguring E-Mail Receiving Settings Conguring E-Mail Communication
Settings(P. 363)
●Conguring Detailed E-Mail Communication Settings (Authentication, Encryption,
etc.) Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
Network
358
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings
1469-06W
This section describes how to congure the e-mail settings by using the Send Function Setting Tool. With the Send
Function Setting Tool, you can also register e-mail addresses to the Address Book.
●The Send Function Setting Tool helps you congure the basic settings for sending e-mails. Instead of the
Send Function Setting Tool, you can use the Remote UI to congure more detailed settings such as the
settings for POP authentication before sending or for encrypted communication. Conguring E-Mail
Communication Settings(P. 363)
1Start the Send Function Setting Tool.
Using a Web browser
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Using the provided DVD-ROM
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
●If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup]
Screen(P. 668) .
Network
359
●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
4Click [Next].
●If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].
If the screen below appears
●Click [Yes].
5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]
●Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the
machine, and then click [OK].
6Conrm the settings and click [OK].
2Click [Start].
Network
360
●If the logon screen is displayed, enter the appropriate PIN, and click [Logon].
3Click [Send to E-mail Settings].
●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,
and click [OK]. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
4Specify the required settings.
[Registration]
[One-touch Speed Dial Number]
With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into <One-Touch> in the
Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.
Network
361
[Name for One-touch Speed Dial Number]
Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in the Address Book.
[Send Destination Settings]
[Destination E-mail Address]
Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned documents to.
[SMTP Server Settings]
[SMTP Server]
Enter the SMTP server name.
[SMTP Authentication]
Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When
[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [User Name] text box and password in the [Password] text
box.
Authentication methods for sending e-mails
●To prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP
AUTH) and POP before SMTP. For more information about the required authentication method, contact
your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●POP before SMTP authentication can only be congured by using the Remote UI. Conguring E-Mail
Communication Settings(P. 363)
5Click [Next].
6Conrm the settings and click [Register].
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using. For more information, contact
your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
●To enable TLS for e-mailing, see Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363) .
●To change port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers (P. 409) .
LINKS
Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 358)
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Network
362
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings
1469-06X
Use the Remote UI to congure the detailed send and receive settings, such as the settings for POP authentication and
encryption of communication before you send e-mail. Contact your provider or network administrator for the required
settings.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [E-Mail Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Network
363
5Specify the required settings.
[SMTP Server]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail.
[E-Mail Address]
Enter up to 120 characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.
[POP Server]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name or IP address for sending e-mail.
[User Name]
Enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specied e-mail account when a POP3
server is used.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select this check box and enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters in [Password].
Conguring Pop Authentication before Sending
POP before SMTP authentication prevents unauthorized users from using e-mail by performing user
authentication on the POP3 server.
[Use POP Authentication Before Sending]
To use the POP3 server for authentication before you send e-mail, select the check box.
[Use APOP Authentication]
Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.
Network
364
Conguring SMTP authentication
If you congure SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH), user identication by user name and password is
performed at the time of sending e-mail.
[Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)]
To enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter up to 64 characters in the [User
Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To specify or change the password, enter up to 32 characters in the [Password] text box.
Conguring encrypted communication
You can congure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server.
[Use TLS for SMTP]
Select the check box to use TLS for encrypting communication with the SMTP server. Select the check box for
[Verify Certicate] or [Add CN to Verication Items] depending on your needs.
[Use TLS for POP]
Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the [Verify Certicate]
and [Add CN to Verication Items] check boxes as required.
6Click [OK].
Network
365
●Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting (
Changing Port Numbers (P. 409) ). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network
Administrator.
LINKS
Conguring Scan Settings (Sending E-Mail)(P. 358)
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 359)
Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the Machine(P. 246)
Network
366
Conguring the Machine for Scanning to Shared
Folders
1469-06Y
Before conguring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup ow shown below.
Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
Make sure that you have the following information:
●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
●The name of the computer where the shared folder is located. Checking the
Computer Name(P. 671)
●Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the
folder, the user name and password information is also needed).
●For instructions on how to create a new shared folder, see "Send Setting Guide."
Make sure that the computer meets the following system requirements for the
Send Function Setting Tool:
●Operating system
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012
●Web browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later
●Display
SVGA monitor (with at least 800 x 600 pixel screen resolution) that supports at
least 256 colors
●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.
Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
Disabling Remote UI (P. 424)
Set the machine conguration. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save
Location(P. 368)
Network
367
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location
1469-070
The feature of scanning to shared folders is also called "Scan to SMB" because the feature uses Server Message Block
(SMB), a Windows-specic technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and printers, with more
than one device in a network ( Conguring SMB (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 382) ). To congure the machine for
saving your scanned documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB, specify the location of the shared folder
from a computer in advance. This section describes how to specify the save location by using the Send Function
Setting Tool.
●You can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder as save destination by registering
the folder to the Address Book. Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
1Start the Send Function Setting Tool.
Using a Web browser
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,
and press the [ENTER] key.
Using the provided DVD-ROM
1Insert the provided DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.
●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.
2Click [Start Software Programs].
Network
368
●If the above screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup]
Screen(P. 668) .
●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].
3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].
4Click [Next].
●If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].
If the screen below appears
●Click [Yes].
5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].
If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]
●Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the
machine, and then click [OK].
6Conrm the settings and click [OK].
2Click [Start].
Network
369
●If the logon screen is displayed, enter the appropriate PIN, and click [Logon].
3Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].
●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,
and click [OK]. Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
4Specify the required settings.
[Registration]
[One-touch Speed Dial Number]
With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register a shared folder for saving scanned documents
into <One-Touch> in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.
Network
370
[Name for One-touch Speed Dial Number]
Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in the Address Book.
[Store Destination Settings]
[Protocol]
The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.
[Computer Name of Store Destination]
Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.
[Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer]
Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named
"share" and is contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter
"users\public\share."
[Status of Settings for Shared Folder]
[Access Restriction to Shared Folder]
Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When
[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the
[Password to Access] text box.
5Click [Next].
6Conrm the settings and click [Register].
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
LINKS
Conguring the Machine for Scanning to Shared Folders(P. 367)
Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253)
Network
371
Conguring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
1469-071
The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. Specify the settings necessary to suit
your network environment.
Network
372
Conguring Ethernet Settings
1469-072
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set the communication mode
(half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). In general, the machine can be used without
changing the defaults ( Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 482) ), but you can change these settings to suit your network
environment.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings> <Auto Detect>.
4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
Conguring Ethernet settings automatically
Tap <On>. The machine detects and automatically sets the communication mode and the Ethernet type that
can be used.
Conguring Ethernet settings manually
1Tap <Off>.
2Select the communication mode.
●Tap <Communication Mode> tap <Half Duplex> or <Full Duplex>.
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
Network
373
3Select the Ethernet type.
●Tap <Ethernet Type> tap <10BASE-T> or <100BASE-TX>.
4Tap <Apply>.
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 375)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 376)
Network
374
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
1469-073
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.
4Select the MTU.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 373)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 376)
Network
375
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
1469-074
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Tap <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.
4Enter the wait time in seconds, and tap <Apply>.
●Use / or the numeric keys to enter the time.
LINKS
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 373)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 375)
Network
376
Conguring DNS
1469-075
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Congure DNS settings.
Network
377
Conguring IPv4 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.
●Settable options vary depending on the machine model.
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to
the DNS server.
[Domain Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such
as "example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
Network
378
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
[Acquire SMTP Server Address] (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server.
[Acquire POP Server Address] (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.
3Click [OK].
Conguring IPv6 DNS
1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.
●The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting IPv6
Addresses(P. 340)
Network
379
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to
the DNS server.
[Domain Name]
Enter up to 47 alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such
as "example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
3Click [OK].
Network
380
Using the operation panel
DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. IPv4 Settings(P. 476) IPv6
Settings(P. 477)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 337)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 340)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
Network
381
Conguring SMB
1469-076
Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and
printers, with more than one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store
scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending on your network, you may have
to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.
NetBIOS Name
In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected
computers as well as for le sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as
the NetBIOS name.
Workgroup Name
Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as le
sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the
machine belongs to.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [SMB Settings].
Network
382
4Click [Edit].
5Specify the required settings and click [OK].
[NetBIOS Name]
Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.
[Workgroup Name]
Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.
Network
383
Conguring SNTP
1469-077
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by
using the time server on the network. The protocol is typically used for synchronizing
the machine and a server. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC), so specify the time zone setting before conguring SNTP ( Date/Time
Settings(P. 489) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.
●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Network
384
4Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) of up to 255 alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next. Specify an interval from 1 to 48 hours.
6Click [OK].
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
●You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network
Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] and then clicking [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings] that appears. If a
proper connection has been established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation
does not adjust the system clock.
Network
385
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
1469-078
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Enabling TLS Encrypted
Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) ).
●The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.
●To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers (P. 409) .
●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Network
386
3Click [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Specify SNMPv1 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
387
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software.
Select the check box to use Dedicated Community. If you do not need to use Dedicated Community, clear the
check box.
6Specify SNMPv3 settings.
●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
Network
388
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
If you selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security
Settings], select the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
If you selected [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings], select the algorithm that
corresponds to your environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter between 6 and 16 alphanumeric characters
for the password in the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter
the same password in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and
encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.
7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
Network
389
●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8Click [OK].
Disabling SNMPv1
●Some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine information via the
printer driver.
Using the operation panel
●You can also specify SNMPv1 settings and enable/disable SNMPv3 settings from the <Menu> in the <Home>
screen. SNMP Settings(P. 480)
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426)
Network
390
Security
Security ................................................................................................................................................................ 392
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access ....................................................................................... 393
Preventing Unauthorized Access .................................................................................................................. 394
Setting Access Privileges .............................................................................................................................. 396
Setting the System Manager PIN ........................................................................................................... 397
Setting a Remote UI PIN ........................................................................................................................ 399
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 401
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules ............................................................................................. 402
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules ......................................................................................... 406
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 409
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 411
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 413
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions ......................................................................... 414
Setting a PIN for Address Book .............................................................................................................. 415
Limiting Available Destinations .............................................................................................................. 417
Prohibiting PC Faxing ............................................................................................................................ 418
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations ...................................................................................... 419
Checking Destinations before Sending Documents ............................................................................... 420
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting ...................................................................................................... 422
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 423
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 424
Implementing Robust Security Features ......................................................................................................... 425
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI ......................................................................... 426
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication ....................................................................................................... 429
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ........................................................................... 434
Generating Key Pairs ............................................................................................................................. 436
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ................................................................................. 443
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates ............................................................................................. 446
Security
391
Security
1469-079
Condential information is handled by information devices everywhere, including computers and printers, and any of
these devices may become a target for malicious third parties at anytime. Attackers may directly gain unauthorized
access to your devices, or indirectly take advantage of negligence or improper use. Either way, you may incur
unanticipated losses when your condential information is leaked. To counter these risks, the machine is equipped
with a variety of security functions. Set the necessary conguration depending on your network environment.
●You can congure the best security system by building an environment that inhibits access to printers on
your in-house network via the Internet and using such environment together with the machine's security
features. Preventing Unauthorized Access(P. 394)
◼Establishing the Basics of Information Security
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access(P. 393)
◼Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 413)
◼Implementing Robust Security Features
Implementing Robust Security Features (P. 425)
Security
392
Protecting the Machine from Unauthorized Access
1469-07A
Prevent unauthorized third parties from accessing and using the machine. You can implement multiple security
measures, such as using rewalls and changing port numbers.
Security
393
Preventing Unauthorized Access
1469-07C
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address (P. 394)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission (P. 395)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 395)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine(P. 395)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
●From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
●From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
●From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 337) .
●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents
Security
394
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Rules(P. 402) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Implementing Robust Security Features (P. 425) , and
on the procedures to specify, see Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Multifunction Machine
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printer/multifunction machine
enables you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
●Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN (P. 399) .
●Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397) .
●Address Book PIN
For more information on setting a PIN, see Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Security(P. 392) and take necessary security measures for preventing
unauthorized access to suit your environment.
Security
395
Setting Access Privileges
1469-07E
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. When
privileges are set, the user must enter a PIN to change settings or access the Remote UI.
Access privileges are divided into two types: System Manager Mode and General User Mode. System Manager Mode
has full access privileges, and a System Manager PIN can be set to restrict logon in this mode. And by setting a Remote
UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI in General User Mode and in System Manager Mode without a
System Manager PIN set.
System Manager PIN
System Manager PIN is intended exclusively for Administrators having full access privileges. If you specify this
PIN, you need to log on to the machine using this PIN in order to access <Network Settings> or <System
Management Settings>. Set the System Manager PIN when you need different access privilege levels for
administrators and general users.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Setting a Remote UI PIN (P. 399)
Security
396
Setting the System Manager PIN
1469-07F
Set a System Manager PIN that is intended exclusively for Administrators. You can access <Network Settings>, <System
Management Settings>, etc. only when the PIN has been entered correctly. It is recommended that only
Administrators know the PIN.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
3Select <System Manager Information Settings> <System Manager PIN>.
4Specify the System Manager PIN.
●Enter a number of up to seven digits using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
●When <PIN (Conrm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to conrm.
●You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".
●To disable the PIN, press to erase the PIN (leave the text box blank), and tap <Apply>.
Setting the System Manager Name
1Tap <System Manager Name>.
2Enter up to 32 characters for the System Manager Name, and tap <Apply>. Entering Text(P. 38)
Security
397
Conguring settings via the Remote UI
●Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [System
Management] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
●By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as to the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 459)
If PIN is forgotten
●Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
If a System Manager PIN is Set
●If you try to access <Network Settings>, <System Management
Settings>, etc., the following screen is displayed. Enter the set PIN.
●Entering a PIN is also required when logging on in System Manager
Mode in the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
Security
398
Setting a Remote UI PIN
1469-07H
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
4Click [Edit].
Security
399
5Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select this check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set a PIN, select the check box and enter a number of up to seven digits both in the [PIN] and [Conrm]
text boxes.
6Click [OK].
If PIN is forgotten
●Set a new Remote UI Access PIN in the settings menu on the operation panel. Remote UI Settings(P. 531)
If Remote UI settings are initialized
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. Initializing Menu(P. 623)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 396)
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Security
400
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
1469-07J
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.
Security
401
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules
1469-07K
You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
●Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.
●The packet lters described in this section control communications over TCP, UDP, and ICMP.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [IP Address Filter].
4Click [Edit] for the lter type that you want to use.
Security
402
[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv4 addresses.
[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying IPv6 addresses.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
[Blocked Addresses]
Register addresses to be blocked, as well as check or delete registered blocked addresses.
[Allowed Addresses]
Register addresses to be allowed, as well as check or delete registered allowed addresses.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box.
●Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
2Specify the address.
●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Security
403
Registered address Result
[Blocked Addresses]
Restricts communication (received) with devices having their IP addresses entered
for [Address to Register]. Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP
addresses.
[Allowed Addresses]
Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses entered
for [Address to Register], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP
addresses.
Registered as both
Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses
registered in [Allowed Addresses], and restricts communication with devices with any
other IP addresses. However, communication is restricted for IP addresses also
registered in [Blocked Addresses].
Check for entry errors
If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>. IPv4 Address
Filter (P. 530) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 531)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description Example
Entering a single address IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
192.168.0.10
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric
characters with colons.
fe80::10
Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the
addresses.
IPv4:
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
IPv6:
fe80::10-fe80::20
Specifying a range of addresses with a
prex (IPv6 only)
Enter the address, followed by
a slash and a number
indicating the prex length.
fe80::1234/64
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
Select an IP address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
Security
404
You can enable or disable the IP Address Filter settings from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. IPv4 Address
Filter (P. 530) IPv6 Address Filter (P. 531)
LINKS
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 406)
Security
405
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules
1469-07L
You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses, or block devices with specied MAC
addresses but permit other communications. Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specied.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].
4Click [Edit].
Security
406
[Inbound Filter]
Select to restrict receiving data from the machine to a computer by specifying MAC addresses.
5Specify the settings for packet ltering.
1Select the [Use Filter] check box.
●Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
2Specify the address.
●Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add]. Allows communication
(received) only with devices having registered MAC addresses, and restricts communication with
devices with any other MAC addresses.
●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. MAC Address Filter (P. 531)
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
3Click [OK].
Security
407
You can enable or disable the MAC Address Filter settings from <Menu> in the <Home> Screen. MAC Address
Filter (P. 531)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 402)
Security
408
Changing Port Numbers
1469-07R
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
To change the port number for proxy server, see Setting a Proxy (P. 411) .
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.
4Tap the port to change.
Learning more about the ports
●<LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 348)
●<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
●<POP3>/<SMTP> Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
●<SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 386)
5Enter the port number using the numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
Security
409
LINKS
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 351)
Security
410
Setting a Proxy
1469-07S
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
4Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
Security
411
5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary. Enter a number between 1 and 65535.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
Select the check box to use a proxy server specied in the same domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric
characters for the user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6Click [OK].
Security
412
Restricting the Machine's Functions
1469-07U
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions(P. 414)
Disabling HTTP Communication and Remote Management
Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
Disabling Remote UI (P. 424)
Security
413
Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending
Functions
1469-07W
Some cases of information leakage can be prevented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those
registered in the Address Book or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users cannot add or edit
Address Book entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the machine is set to ask you
to enter the fax number twice for conrmation.
Security
414
Setting a PIN for Address Book
1469-07X
The Address Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new
entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries. Setting a PIN to the Address
Book can reduce the risk of documents being sent to unintended recipients because
changes to the Address Book can only be made by users who know the PIN.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Restrict TX Function> <Address Book PIN>.
4Set the PIN for editing the Address Book.
●Enter a number of up to seven digits using numeric keys, and tap <Apply>.
●When <PIN (Conrm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to conrm.
●You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".
●To disable the PIN, press to erase the PIN (leave the text box blank), and tap <Apply>.
In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, you can further enhance security by performing the following
operations:
●Restricting the addition of new destinations Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
●Disabling the PC fax function Prohibiting PC Faxing(P. 418)
LINKS
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 359)
Security
415
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 368)
Security
416
Limiting Available Destinations
1469-07Y
By limiting fax numbers that can be specied when sending documents to those
already registered in the Address Book, those registered as One-Touch Dial, or those
previously used, you can reduce the possibility of specifying incorrect destinations
and prevent users from leaking information. Destinations for sending scanned
documents by e-mail are also limited.
When this function is enabled, the machine prohibits users from entering
destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries to the Address Book, and
editing the existing Address Book entries.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict New Destinations>.
4Tap <On>.
<Off>
Cancels the restriction on new destinations. Fax numbers and e-mail addresses can be specied by using
any method.
<On>
Restricts input so that the only addresses that can be specied are those registered in the Address Book,
those registered as One-Touch Dial, or those previously used.
This function does not limit the available destinations for PC faxing.
Prohibiting PC Faxing(P. 418)
LINKS
Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations(P. 419)
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting(P. 422)
Security
417
Prohibiting PC Faxing
1469-080
You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Fax Settings>.
3Select <TX Function Settings> <Allow Fax Driver TX>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
4Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables PC faxing.
<On>
Enables PC faxing.
LINKS
Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 167)
Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
Security
418
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations
1469-081
Prohibits the specication of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations
being selected from the transmission records for "Send Fax", "Scan and Send as E-Mail" and "Scan and Save to Shared
Folder".
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict Resending from Log>.
4Tap <On>.
<Off>
Enables use of previously used destinations.
<On>
Disables use of previously used destinations.
LINKS
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting(P. 422)
Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 130)
Specifying Previously Used Destinations(P. 281)
Security
419
Checking Destinations before Sending Documents
1469-082
By entering the fax number twice, you can reduce the risk of faxing to the wrong number due to input mistakes. Use
features described in this section if you send condential documents.
Displaying the Screen for Conrming the Fax Number(P. 420)
Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 420)
Displaying the Screen for Conrming the Fax Number
You can set the machine to ask users to enter the fax number twice when it is entered by using the numeric keys. This
way, you can reduce the risk of faxing to the wrong number due to input mistakes.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Fax Settings>.
3Select <TX Function Settings> <Conrm Entered Fax Number>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
4Tap <On>.
<Off>
Does not display the screen for conrming the fax number.
<On>
Displays the screen for conrming the fax number.
Displaying Destinations in Address Book
When using One-Touch buttons or coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to remember whose
destination (or what group) is registered in what coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers
perfectly, you may send your documents to unintended destinations. You can avoid sending data to unintended
recipients by conguring the machine to display the details of the One-Touch button or coded dial number you
selected/entered as a sending destination before you send documents to that destination.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
Security
420
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Restrict TX Function> <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation>.
4Tap <On>.
<Off>
Does not display the details of the selected/entered One-Touch button or coded dial number.
<On>
Displays the details of the selected/entered One-Touch button or coded dial number.
LINKS
Registering Destinations(P. 178)
Specifying from Address Book(P. 121)
Specifying from Address Book(P. 273)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
Security
421
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting
1469-083
Sequential broadcasting is a feature that sends faxes to multiple recipients in succession. This feature can be disabled
if preferred.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Fax Settings>.
3Select <TX Function Settings> <Restrict Sequential Broadcast>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
4Select <Conrm Sequential Broadcast> or <Reject Sequential Broadcast>.
<Off>
Enables sequential broadcasting.
<Conrm Sequential Broadcast>
Displays the conrmation screen when sending a fax via sequential broadcasting.
<Reject Sequential Broadcast>
Disables sequential broadcasting.
LINKS
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations(P. 419)
Sending Faxes to Multiple Destinations Simultaneously (Sequential Broadcast)(P. 148)
Security
422
Disabling HTTP Communication
1469-084
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <Network Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Use HTTP>.
4Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables HTTP communication.
<On>
Enables HTTP communication.
LINKS
Using Remote UI (P. 449)
Changing Port Numbers (P. 409)
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 348)
Security
423
Disabling Remote UI
1469-085
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If you do not need to use the Remote
UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the
network by malicious third parties.
1Tap <Menu> in the <Home> Screen.
2Tap <System Management Settings>.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
3Select <Remote UI Settings> <Use Remote UI>.
4Tap <Off>.
<Off>
Disables the Remote UI.
<On>
Enables the Remote UI.
LINKS
Using Remote UI (P. 449)
Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
Security
424
Implementing Robust Security Features
1469-086
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,
and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426)
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 434)
Security
425
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote
UI
1469-087
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer
Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when
the Remote UI is used for specifying settings for IEEE 802.1X authentication (TTLS/PEAP) or SNMPv3. To use TLS for the
Remote UI, you need to set a key pair and enable the TLS function. Generate or install the key pair for TLS before
enabling TLS ( Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 434) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].
Security
426
4Click [Key and Certicate] in [TLS Settings].
5Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use.
Viewing details of a certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
6Enable TLS for the Remote UI.
1Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].
2Click [Edit].
Security
427
3Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the <Home> screen. Use
TLS(P. 530)
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
●If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
Enabling TLS for e-mailing (MF249dw / MF247dw)
●If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with these
servers ( Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363) ). For more information about the SMTP
server and the POP3 server, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 436)
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 443)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 386)
Security
428
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication
1469-088
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key pair or CA certicate
before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 443) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A
key pair issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when authenticating the
machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be used in addition to a
CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate for
the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used with
PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MS-CHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol. Enable
TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Enabling TLS Encrypted
Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) ).
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
429
3Click [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].
4Click [Edit].
5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, enter the login name in the [Login Name] text
box, and specify the required settings.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Security
430
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
Setting TLS
1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].
2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key pair you want to use for the client authentication.
Viewing details of a key pair or certicate
●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon. Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
●You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP. If you want to use PAP, click the [PAP] radio button.
Security
431
2Click [Change User Name/Password].
●To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3Set the user name/password and click [OK].
[User Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the
new password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.
6Click [OK].
7Restart the machine.
●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Security
432
Using the operation panel
●You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the <Home> screen. IEEE
802.1X Settings(P. 482)
LINKS
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 434)
Security
433
Conguring Settings for Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates
1469-089
In order to encrypt communication with a remote device, an encryption key must be sent and received over an
unsecured network beforehand. This problem is solved by public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography ensures
secure communication by protecting important and valuable information from attacks, such as sning, spoong, and
tampering of data as it ows over a network.
Key Pair
A key pair consists of a public key and a secret key, both of which are required for encrypting or
decrypting data. Because data that has been encrypted with one of the key pair cannot be
returned to its original data form without the other, public-key cryptography ensures secure
communication of data over the network. A key pair is used for TLS encrypted communication
or TLS of the IEEE 802.1X authentication. Up to ve key pairs (including the preinstalled pairs)
can be generated to the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital
Certicates(P. 443) ). A key pair can be generated with the machine ( Generating Key
Pairs(P. 436) ).
CA Certicate
Digital certicates including CA certicates are similar to other forms of identication, such as
driver's licenses. A digital certicate contains a digital signature, which enables the machine to
detect any spoong or tampering of data. It is extremely dicult for third parties to abuse
digital certicates. A digital certicate that contains a public key of a certication authority (CA)
is referred to as a CA certicate. CA certicates are used for verifying the device the machine is
communicating with for features such as printing with Google Cloud Print or IEEE 802.1X
authentication. Up to 67 CA certicates can be registered, including the 62 certicates that are
preinstalled in the machine ( Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 443) ).
◼Key and Certicate Requirements
The certicate contained in a key pair generated with the machine conforms to X.509v3. If you install a key pair or a CA
certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
Format ●Key pair: PKCS#12*1
●CA certicate: X.509v1 or X.509v3, DER (encoded binary), PEM
File extension ●Key pair: ".p12" or ".pfx"
●CA certicate: ".cer"
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
RSA (512 bits, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, or 4096 bits)
Certicate signature algorithm SHA1-RSA, SHA256-RSA, SHA384-RSA*2, SHA512-RSA*2, MD5-RSA, or MD2-RSA
Certicate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1 Requirements for the certicate contained in a key pair are pursuant to CA certicates.
*2 SHA384-RSA and SHA512-RSA are available only when the RSA key length is 1024 bits or more.
Security
434
●The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).
Security
435
Generating Key Pairs
1469-08A
A key pair can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via Transport Layer
Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Up to ve key pairs (including the
preinstalled pairs) can be generated to the machine. Self-signed certicates are used with key pairs generated in
"Network Communication". With a "Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)", you can apply for a CA-issued digital
certicate for the key pair generated by the machine.
Generate Network Communication Key(P. 436)
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 438)
Generate Network Communication Key
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
Security
436
4Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE
802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before
deleting it.
5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Security
437
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the
number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
●[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature
Algorithm].
[Certicate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certicate in the range between 01/01/2000 and 12/31/2099, in the
order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certicate in the range between 01/01/2000 and 12/31/2099, in the
order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than [Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common
Name" is often abbreviated as "CN."
7Click [OK].
●Keys for network communication may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
●After a key pair is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
Generate Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
Security
438
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Generate Key].
Deleting a registered key pair
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair you want to delete click [OK].
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE
802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before
deleting it.
5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
Security
439
6Specify settings for the key and certicate.
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for naming the key pair. Set a name that will be easy for you to
nd later in a list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
RSA is used for generating a key pair. Select the key length from the drop-down list. The larger the
number for the key length, the slower the communication. However, the security is tighter.
●[512-bit] cannot be selected for the key length, if [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected for [Signature
Algorithm].
[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Security
440
Enter up to 48 alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common
Name" is often abbreviated as "CN."
7Click [OK].
●Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) may take approximately 10 to 15 minutes to generate.
8Click [Store in File].
●A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].
➠The Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) le is stored on the computer.
9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.
◼Registering the CA-issued Digital Certicate
You cannot use the key pair generated by the Certicate Signing Request (CSR) until the certicate is registered. Once
the certication authority has issued the digital certicate, register it using the procedure below.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in Administrator mode.
Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].
4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] for the certicate to be registered.
Security
441
5Click [Register Certicate].
6Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing request, and click [Register].
LINKS
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 443)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426)
Security
442
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
1469-08C
Key pairs and digital certicates can be obtained from a certication authority (CA) for use with the machine. You can
store and then register these les by using the Remote UI. Make sure that the key pair and the certicate satisfy the
requirements of the machine ( Key and Certicate Requirements(P. 434) ). Up to ve key pairs (including the
preinstalled key pairs) and up to 67 CA certicates (including the 62 preinstalled certicates) can be registered.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA certicate.
Security
443
4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].
Deleting a registered key pair or CA certicate
●Click [Delete] on the right of the key pair or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK]. You cannot
delete the preinstalled CA certicates.
●A key pair cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" or "[IEEE
802.1X]" is displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key pair before
deleting it. The preinstalled CA certicate cannot be deleted.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates
●Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.
5Click [Install].
Deleting a key pair or CA certicate le
●Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].
6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].
➠The key pair or CA certicate is installed in the machine.
Security
444
7Register the key pair or CA certicate.
Registering a key pair
1Click [Register] on the right of the key pair you want to register.
2Enter the name of the key pair and password, and then click [OK].
[Key Name]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the name of the key pair to be registered.
[Password]
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be
registered.
Registering a CA certicate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate you want to register.
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 436)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426)
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
Security
445
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates
1469-08E
Once key pairs and CA certicates are registered, you can view their detailed information or verify them for validity
and signature.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].
●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to verify a key pair, or [CA Certicate Settings] to verify a CA certicate.
4Click the icon for the key pair or certicate that you want to verify.
Security
446
➠Certicate details can be viewed on this screen.
5Check the details of the certicate, and click [Verify Certicate].
➠The result from verifying the certicate is displayed as shown below.
LINKS
Generating Key Pairs(P. 436)
Using CA-issued Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 443)
Security
447
Using Remote UI
Using Remote UI ............................................................................................................................................. 449
Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 450
Remote UI Screens ............................................................................................................................................ 452
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status .............................................................................. 456
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ...................................................................................................... 461
Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI .............................................................................................. 463
Registering Address Book from Remote UI ..................................................................................................... 467
Using Remote UI
448
Using Remote UI
1469-08F
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make some settings such as registering the Address Book. You can do this without
leaving your desk, making system management easier.
Functions of the Remote UI
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine Status(P. 456)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 461)
Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 463)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
Remote UI Screens(P. 452)
System Requirements
The following environment is required to use the Remote UI. In addition, set the Web browser to enable
Cookies.
Windows
●Windows Vista/7/8/10
●Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 or later
Mac OS
●Mac OS 10.6 or later (except for Classic environment)
●Safari 3.2.1 or later
Using Remote UI
449
Starting Remote UI
1469-08H
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 344) ). If you have any
questions, ask your Network Administrator.
1Start the Web browser.
2Enter "http://(the IP address of the machine)/" in the address eld, and press the
[ENTER] key.
●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
●A security alert may be displayed if communication with an Apple device is encrypted ( Enabling TLS
Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no
errors, continue browsing the Web site.
●A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Enabling TLS
Encrypted Communication for the Remote UI(P. 426) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no
errors, continue browsing the website.
3Log on to the Remote UI.
When a System Manager PIN is not set
Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode].
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings. Enter the appropriate PIN in [System Manager
PIN] ( Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397) ). If [System Manager PIN] is not set, you do not need
to input anything.
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. If
you wish to delete your print documents, enter the user name of the documents in [User Name]. The user
Using Remote UI
450
name is automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or
computer logon name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN (P. 399)
When a System Manager PIN is set
Enter the registered [System Manager PIN]. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
4Click [Log In].
●Portal Page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screens(P. 452)
Using Remote UI
451
Remote UI Screens
1469-08J
This section describes the typical screens of the Remote UI.
Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 452)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page(P. 453)
[Settings/Registration] Page(P. 454)
[Address Book] Page(P. 455)
Portal Page (Main Page)
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]
under [System Management].
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Device Basic Information
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
Consumables Information
Displays paper information and the amount remaining in the toner cartridges.
Click [Check Consumables Details] to display the screen for checking consumables. Checking
Consumables(P. 458)
Using Remote UI
452
Support Link
Displays the support link specied in [Device Information] under [System Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the status of the current print documents and history of print, copy, send, and received documents.
You can also check the status of the machine.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged on in System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 461)
[Address Book]
Displays the destinations registered in the Address Book. You can also register or edit the Address Book
when you have logged on in System Manager Mode. Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, and the content is displayed in the right page. Managing Documents and Checking the
Machine Status(P. 456)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
Using Remote UI
453
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
[Settings/Registration] Page
[To Portal]
Returns to Portal Page (main page).
Menu
Click an item, the content is displayed in the right page. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote
UI(P. 461)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
System Management Settings
●You can only set [System Management Settings] when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
●When you have logged on in General User Mode, only [System Management] will be displayed.
Using Remote UI
454
[Address Book] Page
[To Portal]
Displays Portal Page (main page).
[One-Touch]
Displays the list of the One-Touch. Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
[Coded Dial]
Displays the list of the coded dial numbers. Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Breadcrumb Trail
Indicates the series of pages you opened to display the currently displayed page. You can check what page is
currently displayed.
List Number
Species the range of coded dial numbers displayed on the page.
Top Icon
Moves the scroll box up to the top of the page when the page is scrolled down.
Registering/Editing the Address Book
You can register or edit the Address Book when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
Using Remote UI
455
Managing Documents and Checking the Machine
Status
1469-08K
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 456)
Checking the Status of Received Faxes(P. 457)
Checking History of Documents(P. 457)
Checking Error Information(P. 458)
Checking Consumables(P. 458)
Checking Maximum Print Speed(P. 459)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 459)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 460)
The document le name displays only 255 characters. The printed application name may be added to the le
name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
under [Print]
You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
●If you logged on in System Manager Mode, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to
be printed will be listed.
●If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
Using Remote UI
456
●Click [Job Number] on the paused documents to display detailed information. You can check the user
name and the page count of the printed document.
Checking the Status of Received Faxes
You can check the status (printing/queued for printing) of up to 90 received faxes.
You can also check a preview of received faxes stored in memory.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Status]
under [RX]
You can delete a document job by clicking [Delete].
●Click [Job Number] while a fax job is waiting to be printed to view fax details. You can check the
sender, number of prints, any received images, and other information. Previewing Documents
from the Remote UI(P. 152)
Checking History of Documents
The history of sending faxes/e-mails (TX) or receiving faxes (RX) is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Job Log]
Using Remote UI
457
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on
Portal Page (main page). Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 452)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Error
Information]
Checking Consumables
Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click
[Check Consumables Details] in Portal Page (Main Page)(P. 452) to display this page.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Consumables]
Using Remote UI
458
Checking Maximum Print Speed
The maximum print speed is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Features]
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management]
on the [Settings/Registration] page. System Management Settings(P. 529)
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Device
Information]
Using Remote UI
459
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed.
Log on to the Remote UI ( Starting Remote UI(P. 450) ) [Status Monitor/Cancel] [Check
Counter]
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 452)
Using Remote UI
460
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
1469-08L
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI.
Some settings require you to rst log on in System Manager Mode before you can change them.
1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click the menu item you want to set, then click [Edit].
●For more information about the settings menu, see each item below
Menu items Referents
Preferences
Using Remote UI
461
Menu items Referents
Paper Settings Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
Sound Volume Control/Display Settings Preferences(P. 483)
Timer Settings Timer Settings(P. 489)
Function Settings
Common Settings Common Settings (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 493)
Copy Settings Copy Settings(P. 495)
Fax Settings Fax Settings (P. 497)
Scan Settings Scan Settings(P. 508)
Printer Settings Printer Settings(P. 513)
Output Report Settings Printing Reports and Lists(P. 608)
System Management Settings
System Management System Management Settings(P. 529)
Network Settings Network (P. 314)
Security Settings Security(P. 392)
Import/Export Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 463)
Initialize Setting Information Initializing Menu(P. 623)
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 452)
Using Remote UI
462
Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI
1469-08R
Address Book data in the machine can be saved in your computer (export). Data that is saved on your computer
can also be registered in the machine (import). You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book to
multiple machines.* To use these features, it is required that you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
* Depending on the model, you cannot import the Address Book that exported from the machine.
Exporting Address Book Data(P. 463)
Loading Address Book Data(P. 464)
Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete
It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may
result in damage to data or the machine.
Do not operate the machine during the export/import process
Before exporting/importing, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently processing.
Exporting Address Book Data
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Export].
Using Remote UI
463
●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the [PIN] and click [OK].
Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
4Click [Start Exporting].
5Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported Address
Book is saved.
●The Address Book will be saved.
Do not operate until the process is complete.
The screen remains the same during the export process. Do not operate the Remote UI until the message [The
(le name) download has completed.] is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Loading Address Book Data
The Address Book data currently registered is overwritten when you load the Address Book data.
1Start the Remote UI and log on in System Manager Mode. Starting Remote
UI(P. 450)
Using Remote UI
464
2Click [Settings/Registration].
3Click [Import/Export] [Import].
●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the [PIN] and click [OK].
Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
4Specify the Address Book le to be imported, and click [Start Importing].
●To specify the le to be imported, click [Browse] and select the le.
5Click [OK].
●The specied Address Book data will be imported into the machine.
Using Remote UI
465
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 452)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Address Book List(P. 618)
Using Remote UI
466
Registering Address Book from Remote UI
1469-08S
You can register or edit the Address Book of the machine by using the computer. Specify the shared folder destination
here.
You can change the settings only when you have logged on in System Manager Mode.
1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 450)
2Click [Address Book].
If the enter PIN page is displayed
The Address Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].
3Click [Coded Dial].
●You can also register destinations in One-Touch. In this case, click [One-Touch] instead of [Coded Dial].
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
4Click the text link under [Number], [Type], or [Name] for an item named "Not
Registered."
Using Remote UI
467
●You can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name].
●You can delete a registered item by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.
5Select [Destination Type to Register] and click [OK].
●To register the shared folder destination, select [File].
6Specify the destination.
To register the fax destination
[Name]
Enter the name of the destination.
[Fax Number]
Enter the fax number of the destination.
[ECM TX]
Select the check box to make the following possible: if an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the
error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent.
[Speed]
Using Remote UI
468
If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust
the transmission start speed downward incrementally starting from [33600 bps].
[Long Distance]
Specify [International (1)] to [International (3)] according to the transmission conditions when registering
overseas fax numbers.
●You can also specify [ECM TX] and [Speed] from <Fax Settings> ( Fax Settings (P. 497) ) on the operation
panel. However, settings made from <Address Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations
registered in the Address Book.
To register the e-mail destination
[Name]
Enter the name of the destination.
[E-Mail Address]
Enter the e-mail address of the destination.
To register the shared folder destination
[Name]
Enter the name for the destination.
[Host Name]
Enter the computer name or IP address using up to 120 characters. You can include a path to the shared
folder with the computer name or IP address (e.g. "\\swan\share" or "\\192.168.2.100\share").
Using a DNS server
●You can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g. for a shared
folder: "\\swan.organization.company.com\share").
[Folder Path]
Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent (up to 120 characters).
Using Remote UI
469
Use "\" as a separator. Specify the level that follows the path specied in [Host Name].
[User Name]
Enter the user name set for the shared folder (up to 32 characters).
[Set Password]
To set a password for the shared folder, select this check box and enter a [Password] of up to 32 characters.
Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the
Remote UI.
●[Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly or may not be referenceable.
7Click [OK].
LINKS
Remote UI Screens(P. 452)
Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 463)
Address Book List(P. 618)
Using Remote UI
470
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 472
Network Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 473
Preferences ........................................................................................................................................................ 483
Timer Settings ................................................................................................................................................... 489
Common Settings (MF249dw / MF247dw) ........................................................................................................ 493
Copy Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 495
Fax Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 497
Scan Settings ..................................................................................................................................................... 508
Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 513
Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 523
System Management Settings .......................................................................................................................... 529
Setting Menu List
471
Setting Menu List
1469-08U
There are various settings in this machine. You can adjust each of the settings in detail. Access these settings by
tapping <Menu> in the Home Screen.
Refer to the diagrams in PDF format that are included with this manual to visualize the mapping of the whole
setting menu. Menu Route Map(P. 676)
You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings: User Data List(P. 620)
Setting Menu List
472
Network Settings
1469-08W
All the settings about the network are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed
Enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Asterisks (*)
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available for the MF249dw / MF247dw.
Select Wired/Wireless LAN(P. 473)
Wireless LAN Settings(P. 473)
Direct Connection Settings(P. 475)
TCP/IP Settings(P. 476)
SNMP Settings(P. 480)
Dedicated Port Settings(P. 481)
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup(P. 482)
Ethernet Driver Settings(P. 482)
IEEE 802.1X Settings(P. 482)
Initialize Network Settings(P. 482)
Select Wired/Wireless LAN *
When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 317)
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Settings *
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption. See "Getting Started" Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659) .
SSID Settings
Select to congure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
Select Access Point
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Menu List
473
Enter Manually
Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 329)
Security Settings
None
WEP
Open System
Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4
Edit WEP Key
Shared Key
Select WEP Key: 1/2/3/4
Edit WEP Key
WPA/WPA2-PSK
Auto
AES-CCMP
WPS Push Button Mode
Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 321)
WPS PIN Code Mode
Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 323)
Power Save Mode
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
Off
On
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed message
<Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>
Wireless LAN Information
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
MAC Address
Wireless LAN Status
Latest Error Information
Channel
SSID Settings
Security Settings
Power Save Mode
Setting Menu List
474
Direct Connection Settings *
Congure settings for Direct Connection. After conguring settings, you can connect to the machine directly and
wirelessly from a mobile device even without an access point or wireless LAN router.
Use Direct Connection
Select whether to use Direct Connection. You can select <Direct Connection Only> or <Wireless LAN/Direct Conn.
(Auto Switch)> when <Use Direct Connection> is set to <On> while the Wirelss LAN connection is enabled.
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 291)
Off
On
Direct Connection Only
Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Use Direct Connection> <On>
Select <Direct Connection Only> or <Wireless LAN/Direct Conn. (Auto Switch)> when <Wireless
LAN> is selected in <Select Wired/Wireless LAN> <Yes>
Time Until Direct Connection Termination
Set the time that the machine exits Direct Connection mode automatically. Can be set when <Use Direct
Connection> is <On>. Once the time set in <Time Until Direct Connection Termination> is reached,
communication between the machine and a mobile device is discontinued. Before starting a large print job, you
should set a long delay time or set the delay time to <0> (Off).
0 (Off)
1 to 10 to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Time Until Direct Connection
Termination> Set time to disconnect <Apply>
Access Point Mode Settings
To make detailed settings, such as authentication and encryption, enter an SSID and network key to congure
settings. Can be set when <Use Direct Connection> is <On>.
Use Custom SSID
Off
On
SSID (1-20 Characters)
Use Custom Network Key
Off
On
Network Key (10 Char.)
Setting Menu List
475
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode Settings>
Select <Use Custom SSID> or <Use Custom Network Key> <On> Set SSID Settings or Network
Key Settings <Apply>
TCP/IP Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
IPv4 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
IP Address Settings
Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 337)
Auto Acquire
Select Protocol
Off
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
Auto IP
Off
On
Manually Acquire
IP Address: 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0
Check Settings
Auto Acquire
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
PING Command
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network
Connection(P. 339)
DNS Settings
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P. 377)
DNS Server Settings
Primary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server: 0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
Host Name
Setting Menu List
476
Domain Name
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Off
On
DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 377)
Off
On
mDNS Name
DHCP Option Settings
Select whether to acquire the host name and whether to use the dynamic update function via the DHCP
options when DHCP is enabled. Conguring DNS(P. 377)
Acquire Host Name
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update
Off
On
Acquire SMTP Server Address *
Off
On
Acquire POP Server Address *
Off
On
IPv6 Settings
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
Use IPv6
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings. Setting IPv6
Addresses(P. 340)
Off
On
Check Settings
Link-Local Address
Prex Length
Stateless Address Settings
Enable or disable stateless addresses. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 340)
Setting Menu List
477
Off
On
Check Settings
Stateless Address
Prex Length
Use DHCPv6
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 340)
Off
On
Check Settings
Stateful Address
Prex Length
DNS Settings
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Conguring DNS(P. 377)
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
Use IPv4 Host/Domain
Off
Host Name
Domain Name
On
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Off
On
Register Manual Address
Off
On
Register Stateful Address
Off
On
Register Stateless Address
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Update Interval
0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings
Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers. Conguring DNS(P. 377)
Off
On
Use IPv4 Name for mDNS
Setting Menu List
478
Off
mDNS Name
On
LPD Print Settings
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system.
Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 348)
Off
On
RAW Print Settings
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD
Functions(P. 348)
Off
On
WSD Settings
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer or scanner by using the WSD
protocol that is available on Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012. Conguring Printing Protocols
and WSD Functions(P. 348)
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD Print
Off
On
Use WSD Browsing
Off
On
WSD Scan Settings
Use WSD Scan
Off
On
Use Computer Scan
Off
On
Use Multicast Discovery
Off
On
Use HTTP
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
479
Port Number Settings
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers (P. 409)
LPD
1 to 515 to 65535
RAW
1 to 9100 to 65535
WSD Multicast Discovery
1 to 3702 to 65535
HTTP
1 to 80 to 65535
POP3 *
1 to 110 to 65535
SMTP *
1 to 25 to 65535
SNMP
1 to 161 to 65535
MTU Size
Select the maximum size of packets the machine sends or receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission
Unit(P. 375)
1300
1400
1500
SNMP Settings
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 386)
SNMPv1 Settings
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
Off
On
Community Name 1 Settings
Off
On
Community Name
MIB Access Permission
Community Name 2 Settings
Setting Menu List
480
Off
On
Community Name
MIB Access Permission
Dedicated Community Settings
Off
On
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings>
Select <Off> or <On> Specify settings if <On> is selected
SNMPv3 Settings
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
Off
On
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible software.
Off
On
<Menu> <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>
Select <Off> or <On>
Dedicated Port Settings
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing, faxing, or scanning uses MF Scan
Utility and when browsing or specifying the machine settings over the network.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
481
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
Waiting Time for Connection at Startup
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 376)
0 to 300 (sec.)
Ethernet Driver Settings
Select the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).
You can also view the MAC address of the machine.
Auto Detect
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 373)
Off
Communication Mode
Half Duplex
Full Duplex
Ethernet Type
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
On
MAC Address
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing
the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 345)
IEEE 802.1X Settings
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
Off
On
Initialize Network Settings
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Menu(P. 536)
Setting Menu List
482
Preferences
1469-08X
All the settings about the sound volume and display are listed with short
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed
Enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
●Settings marked with "*2" are unavailable depending on the country or region of purchase.
Volume Settings(P. 483)
Display Settings(P. 485)
Volume Settings
Adjust volume at which the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the operation panel or when a paper jam occurs.
Adjusting the Volume(P. 72)
Fax Tone
Select whether to make a dial tone while a fax is being sent. You can also adjust the volume.
0 to 1 to 5
Ring Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is received. You can also adjust the volume.
0 to 1 to 5
TX Done Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is sent. You can also adjust the volume.
0 to 1 to 5
Only When Error Occurs
Off
On
RX Done Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is received. You can also adjust the volume.
Setting Menu List
483
0 to 1 to 5
Only When Error Occurs
Off
On
Scanning Done Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when scanning fax documents is complete. You can also adjust the volume.
0 to 1 to 5
Only When Error Occurs
Off
On
Entry Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the operation panel.
Off
On
Invalid Entry Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when an invalid settings value is entered, such as when a user is trying to
enter a number unavailable for a setting.
Off
On
Warning Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when problem such as a paper jam or an operation mistake occurs.
Off
On
Job Done Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when copying or scanning is complete.
Off
On
Energy Saver Alert
Select whether the machine beeps when the machine enters or wakes from sleep mode.
Off
On
Original in Feeder Detection Tone
Select whether the machine beeps when an original is loaded in the feeder.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
484
Display Settings
Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset
function is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a
different function.
Home
Copy
Fax
Scan
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration>
Select a function to display the desired screen
Home Screen Button Display Settings
Change the order in which Home Screen buttons are displayed. Customizing the <Home> Screen(P. 33)
Contrast
Adjust the brightness of the display to suit the installation location of the machine.
Five Levels
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Contrast> Use <->/<+> to adjust the
brightness <Apply>
Invert Screen Colors
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Contrast>.
Off
On
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <On> or
<Off>
Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch*1
Select the unit of measurement.
Setting Menu List
485
Millimeter
Inch
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select
<Millimeter> or <Inch>
Notify to Check Paper Settings
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading paper into the
paper drawer or manual feed slot.
Off
On
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> Select <Off>
or <On>
Gram/Pound Switch*2
Select the unit of measurement for the basis weight.
Gram
Pound
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Gram/Pound Switch> Select <Gram> or
<Pound>
Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area
When set to <On>, a message is displayed for dirt or soiling on the original scanning area.
Off
On
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area> Select
<On> or <Off>
Message Display Time
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
Setting Menu List
486
1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Message Display Time> Enter a number for
the interval <Apply>
Scrolling Speed
Adjust the speed for scrolling the screen by selecting from three levels.
Slow
Standard
Fast
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed
Cursor Movement Type
Congure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. Select <Auto> to automatically move
the cursor to the right of the entered character. Select <Manual> to manually move the cursor to the right of the
entered character.
Auto
Manual
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Cursor Movement Type> Select <Auto> or
<Manual>
Language*1
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
Chinese (Simplied)
Chinese (Traditional)
English
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Portuguese
Spanish
Setting Menu List
487
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language <Yes>
Remote UI Language*1
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
Chinese (Simplied)
Chinese (Traditional)
English
French
German
Italian
Japanese
Korean
Portuguese
Spanish
<Menu> <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a language
Setting Menu List
488
Timer Settings
1469-08Y
All the settings about the timer are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Quiet Mode Time(P. 489)
Date/Time Settings(P. 489)
Auto Sleep Time(P. 491)
Auto Reset Time(P. 491)
Function After Auto Reset(P. 492)
Auto Oine Time(P. 492)
Quiet Mode Time
You can reduce the operation sound of the machine when you want it to run more quietly (quiet mode). Set a time for
the machine to enter quiet mode automatically. You can also set the machine to always run in quiet mode. Entering
Quiet Mode(P. 74)
Start Time
Off
On
Start time setting to enter quiet mode
End Time
Off
On
Stop time setting to exit quiet mode
Date/Time Settings
Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting. The date and
time that are printed on each fax document, report, and list are determined by these settings.
Date Format *
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
YYYY MM/DD
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
Setting Menu List
489
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Date Format> Select the date format
Time Format
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
12 Hour (AM/PM)
24 Hour
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Format> Select the display setting
Current Date/Time Settings
Set the current date and time. Use / to move the cursor, and / to specify the date and time or
switch between <AM>/<PM>.
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings> Set the
date and time <Apply>
The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
Time Zone *
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accordingly.
(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West
to
(UTC-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada)
to
(UTC+14:00) Kiritimati Island
Setting Menu List
490
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and
time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone> Select a time zone
Daylight Saving Time Settings *
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect.
Off
On
Start: Month, Day
End: Month, Day
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time Settings> <On>
Select a month and day <Apply>
Auto Sleep Time
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 76)
1 to 30 (min.)
Auto Reset Time
If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the default
screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. Select <0> to disable the Auto Reset
function. The Auto Reset is not performed in the following cases:
●The setting menu is displayed.
●The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents or sending or receiving faxes.
●An error message is displayed and the error indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the error
does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
Setting Menu List
491
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Set the Auto Reset time <Apply>
The screen displayed after the Auto Reset is performed can be selected in <Function After Auto Reset>.
Function After Auto Reset
Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. If <Default Function> is
selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration> is displayed (
Default Screen after Startup/Restoration(P. 485) ). If <Selected Function> is selected, the display returns to the main
screen of the function that was selected.
Default Function
Selected Function
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select <Default Function> or
<Selected Function>
Auto Oine Time
If a key has not been pressed for a specied period of time after the screen below is displayed (the machine is set
online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes oine. Specify the time period at which the machine
becomes oine. You can also set the machine to remain online.
0 (The machine remains online.)
1 to 5 to 60 (min.)
<Menu> <Timer Settings> <Auto Oine Time> Set the time period <Apply>
Setting Menu List
492
Common Settings
1469-090
All the settings about the operation of the paper drawer and the paper feed
method are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with
a dagger ( ).
Switch Paper Feed Method
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. To print on paper with logos, you need to change
how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-sided printing.
However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper face down for both 1- and 2-
sided printing. For more information, see Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 54) .
Multi-Purpose Tray
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Drawer 1
Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
<Menu> <Common Settings> <Switch Paper Feed Method> Select the paper source Select
<Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Paper Sources
Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
Setting Menu List
493
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-
sided printing is selected.
●If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided
printing ( Paper(P. 649) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case, you need
to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted
Paper(P. 54) ).
●1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
Setting Menu List
494
Copy Settings
1469-091
All the settings about the copy are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" are only available for the MF249dw / MF247dw.
●Settings marked with "*2" are only available for the MF249dw.
Change Default Settings (P. 495)
Correct Density(P. 496)
Initialize Default Settings(P. 496)
Change Default Settings
You can change the factory default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the
copy function. Changing Default Settings(P. 100)
Number of Copies
1 to 999
Density
-4 to 0 to +4
Auto Density
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo (High Speed)
Text/Photo
Photo
2-Sided *1
Off
1->2-Sided
2->2-Sided*2
2->1-Sided*2
Original/Finishing Type
Copy Ratio
Custom Ratio
100% (Direct)
Setting Menu List
495
400% (Max)
200%
129% STMT->LTR
78% LGL->LTR
64% LTR->STMT
50%
25% (Min)
N on 1
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
ID Card Copy
Select Layout
Collate
Off
On
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Correct Density
Specify the initial copy density. You can also change the copy density temporarily. Adjusting Density(P. 88)
-4 to 0 to +4
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Correct Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default copy settings.
<Menu> <Copy Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
Setting Menu List
496
Fax Settings
1469-092
All the settings about the fax are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed
Enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" are only available for the MF249dw.
●Settings marked with "*2" are only available for the MF249dw / MF247dw.
●Settings marked with "*3" are unavailable depending on the country or region of purchase.
Basic Settings(P. 497)
TX Function Settings(P. 498)
RX Function Settings(P. 502)
RX Print Settings(P. 504)
Forwarding Settings(P. 506)
Fax Setup Guide(P. 507)
Basic Settings
Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax device.
Register Unit Telephone Number
Register the fax number for the machine. Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 108)
Select Line Type
Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 112)
Pulse
Tone
Public Line Connection
When the fax receive mode is <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, an external telephone may not ring or a call may not be
dialable. In this instance, specify <Adapter 1> or <Adapter 2>.
Direct
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Setting Menu List
497
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Public Line Connection> Select connection
type
Off-Hook Alarm
Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone connected to the machine
is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound.
0 to 5
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Off-Hook Alarm> Select the volume of the alert
sound <Apply>
Communication Management Settings
Adjust the communication start speed in descending order from "33600 bps." This adjustment should be made
when it takes a long time to start sending or receiving a fax due to a poor telephone line connection.
TX Start Speed
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
7200 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
RX Start Speed
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
7200 bps
4800 bps
2400 bps
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Communication Management Settings> Select a
communication start speed
TX Function Settings
Specify settings for sending faxes.
Setting Menu List
498
Change Default Settings
Specify settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default settings when scanning
documents. Changing Default Settings(P. 139)
Resolution
200 x 100 dpi (Normal)
200 x 200 dpi (Fine)
200 x 200 dpi (Photo)
200 x 400 dpi (Superne)
Density
Nine Levels
2-Sided Original *1
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Register Unit Name
Register the name of a company or person. Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 108)
The registered name is sent as sender information to the destination. TX Terminal ID(P. 501)
ECM TX
Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce
errors on received faxes, see ECM RX(P. 502) .
Off
On
●ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error checks are
performed on both the sending and receiving devices.
●Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
●It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error checks
and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <ECM TX> <On>
Set Pause Time
For example, when you make calls by dialing "0 - (pause) - (telephone number)", 0 is dialed rst and then a few
seconds later, the telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing
"(international access code) - (country code) - (area code) - (fax number)" but consecutive numbers that are
Setting Menu List
499
input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this case, try adding a pause after the international
access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized correctly, change the duration
of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see step 3 on Sending Faxes(P. 114) .
1 to 2 to 15 (sec.)
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Set Pause Time> Specify the duration of
pause <Apply>
Auto Redial
Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the
rst attempt fails because the line is busy. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval
between redials.
Off
On
Number of Times to Redial
1 to 2 to 10 (times)
Redial Interval
2 to 99 (min.)
Redial When Error Occurs
Off
On
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Auto Redial> <On> Specify the settings
<Apply>
<Number of Times to Redial>
Species how many times the machine redials. Use / or the numeric keys to enter a number, and tap
<Apply>.
<Redial Interval>
Species the interval between redials. Use / or the numeric keys to enter a number for the interval,
and tap <Apply>.
Setting Menu List
500
<Redial When Error Occurs>
Species whether to redial when a transmission error occurs. Select <Off> or <On>.
TX Terminal ID
Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to
the fax header. The recipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information.
Off
On
Print Position
Inside Image Area
Outside Image Area
Mark Number as
FAX
TEL
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <TX Terminal ID> <On> Specify the
settings <Apply>
<Print Position>
Species the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select <Inside Image Area> to print
the information inside the image area, or <Outside Image Area> to print the information outside the image
area.
<Mark Number as>
Adds the "FAX" or "TEL" mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine ( Registering the Fax
Number and Unit Name(P. 108) ). Select <TEL> to indicate that the notied number is a telephone number.
Check Dial Tone Before Sending *3
Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
501
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Check Dial Tone Before Sending> Select
<On> or <Off>
Allow Fax Driver TX
Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer). Prohibiting PC Faxing(P. 418)
Off
On
Conrm Entered Fax Number
Select whether to require users to enter the fax number twice when it is entered by using the numeric keys.
Displaying the Screen for Conrming the Fax Number(P. 420)
Off
On
Restrict Sequential Broadcast
Select whether to prohibit sequential broadcasting, a feature that sends faxes to multiple destinations in
succession. Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting(P. 422)
Off
Conrm Sequential Broadcast
Reject Sequential Broadcast
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default fax transmission settings.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
RX Function Settings
Specify settings for receiving faxes.
ECM RX
Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce
errors on sent faxes, see ECM TX(P. 499) .
Off
On
●ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error check is
performed on both the sending and receiving devices.
Setting Menu List
502
●Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.
●It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check
and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <ECM RX> <On>
Incoming Ring
Specify settings for sounding a ring to notify you of incoming faxes. This feature is only available when <Auto>
or <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> is selected for the receive mode. Specify how many times the incoming call rings
when the machine receives a fax call. You can also disable the settings to prevent the incoming call from
ringing.
Off
On
1 to 2 to 99 (times)
If you use this feature in the <Auto> mode, you need to connect your telephone to the machine
beforehand.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Incoming Ring> <On> Specify how
many times the incoming call rings <Apply>
Remote RX
Specify settings for receiving a fax by operating a telephone that is connected to the machine (Remote
Reception). When a fax is sent to the machine, you can receive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone
and entering a specic ID number by using the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the
way to the machine. For instructions on how to use Remote Reception, see Using a Telephone to Receive
Faxes (Remote Reception)(P. 144) .
Off
On
00 to 25 to 99
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Remote RX> <On> Specify the ID
number for receiving a fax <Apply>
Setting Menu List
503
Switch to Auto RX
Specify settings for automatically receiving a fax after the machine has rung for a specied time period. This
feature is only available when <Manual> is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be
received even when no one is available to pick up the handset.
Off
On
1 to 15 to 99 (sec.)
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Switch to Auto RX> <On> Specify how
long the incoming call rings <Apply>
Memory Lock Settings
Select whether to store received faxes without immediately printing them. Stored fax documents can be printed
at any time by changing the setting to <Off>. Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
(P. 150)
Off
On
Report Print
Off
On
Memory Lock Time
Off
On
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <On> Specify
settings <Apply>
RX Print Settings
Specify settings for printing received faxes.
Print on Both Sides *2
Specify settings for printing received faxes on both sides of paper.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
504
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Print on Both Sides> <On>
Reduce RX Size
Specify settings for reducing the image size of a received document. You can select an automatic reduction ratio
that reduces the received document to size of the loaded paper. You can also select a ratio from a list.
Off
On
Ratio
Auto
97%
95%
90%
75%
Direction
Vertical/Horizontal
Vertical Only
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Reduce RX Size> <On> Specify the settings
<Apply>
<Ratio>
<Auto> reduces the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper. <97%>, <95%>, <90%>, or
<75%> reduce the image by the corresponding ratio.
<Direction>
Select <Vertical/Horizontal> to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally. Select <Vertical Only> to
reduce only vertically.
RX Page Footer
Select whether to print information, including date and time of reception and page numbers, on the bottom of
received faxes.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
505
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <RX Page Footer> <On>
Continue Print. When Near Cart. Life End
If receiving faxes when the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is nearly empty, the machine holds them in
memory instead of printing. However, if this function is enabled, the machine continues printing.
Off
On
When this function is enabled, faxes may fade or blur. Because received documents are not stored in
memory, you need to ask the sender to resend the document.
<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Continue Print. When Near Cart. Life End>
<On>
Forwarding Settings *2
Specify settings for forwarding faxes.
Enable Forwarding Settings
Select whether to forward all the received fax documents to a specied destination. You can specify an e-mail
address or a shared folder in a computer as the forwarding destination. Forwarding All the Received
Documents Automatically (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 157)
Off
On
Print Images
Select whether to print forwarded fax documents. You can set the machine to print forwarded documents only
when an error occurs. Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 157)
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
Store Images in Memory
Select whether to store fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded. You can resend or
print the documents later as necessary. Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be
Forwarded(P. 158)
Off
Only When Error Occurs
Setting Menu List
506
Fax Setup Guide
Select to display on-screen instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the telephone line type.
Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 106)
Setting Menu List
507
Scan Settings
1469-093
All the settings about the scan are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" are only available for the MF249dw / MF247dw.
●Settings marked with "*2" are only available for the MF249dw.
E-Mail Settings(P. 508)
File Settings(P. 509)
Register Unit Name (E-Mail)(P. 511)
Output File Image Settings(P. 511)
Shortcut Key Settings(P. 511)
E-Mail Settings *1
Specify settings used for scanning documents to send as e-mails.
Change Default Settings
Specify settings used for scanning documents to send as e-mails. The selected settings are used as the default
settings when scanning documents. Changing Default Settings(P. 284)
Scan Size
LTR
LGL
STMT
Color Mode
Color
Black & White
File Format
PDF
PDF (Compact)
JPEG
TIFF
Density
Nine Levels
Setting Menu List
508
Original Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
2-Sided Original*2
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Data Size
Small: Memory Priority
Standard
Large: Image Quality Priority
Subject/Message
Subject
Message
Reply To
None
Specify from Address Book
Priority
Low
Standard
High
Initialize Default Settings
Select this option to restore the default e-mail transmission settings.
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
File Settings *1
You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder.
Setting Menu List
509
Change Default Settings
You can change the default settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder. The selected settings
are used as the default settings when scanning. Changing Default Settings(P. 284)
Scan Size
LTR
LGL
STMT
Color Mode
Color
Black & White
File Format
PDF
PDF (Compact)
JPEG
TIFF
Density
Nine Levels
Original Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Photo
2-Sided Original*2
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
Sharpness
Seven Levels
Data Size
Small: Memory Priority
Standard
Large: Image Quality Priority
Initialize Default Settings
You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder.
Setting Menu List
510
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <File Settings> <Initialize Default Settings> <Yes>
Register Unit Name (E-Mail) *1
Register the sender name for e-mails. The registered name is displayed in e-mails, along with the e-mail
address. If the sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.
<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Register Unit Name (E-Mail)> Enter the sender name <Apply>
Output File Image Settings *1
Specify settings for the gamma value and le compression ratio for converting scanned documents into les.
YCbCr TX Gamma Value
Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color documents into the specied le format. You can
specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted les. The
les are displayed with brightness that is true to the original documents. Setting Gamma Values(P. 271)
Gamma 1.0
Gamma 1.4
Gamma 1.8
Gamma 2.2
Shortcut Key Settings
Register scan settings for the <Scan -> PC1> and <Scan -> PC2> buttons. The settings include the computer that
scanned images are saved in, the type of scan (color or black and white), and the le format (PDF or JPEG).
Registering these settings enables you to scan documents into a specied computer just by pressing a button.
You can view the registered settings by selecting <Conrm Destination>. Scanning Using the <Scan -> PC>
Button(P. 237)
Register
Scan -> PC1
Off
USB Connection
Color Scan
B&W Scan
Custom 1
Custom 2
Network Connection
Color Scan
B&W Scan
Setting Menu List
511
Custom 1
Custom 2
Scan -> PC2
Off
USB Connection
Color Scan
B&W Scan
Custom 1
Custom 2
Network Connection
Color Scan
B&W Scan
Custom 1
Custom 2
Conrm Destination
Scan -> PC1
Scan -> PC2
Setting Menu List
512
Printer Settings
1469-094
All the settings about the printer are listed with short descriptions. Default
settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" are only available for the MF249dw / MF247dw.
●Settings marked with "*2" have different defaults depending on the country or region of purchase.
Priority of settings
●If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when performing PCL printing and
printing from UNIX or other operating system that does not support printer drivers.
Action When Paper Size Mismatch(P. 513)
Mobile Print Halftones(P. 514)
Copies(P. 514)
2-Sided Printing(P. 514)
Default Paper(P. 515)
Print Quality(P. 515)
Layout(P. 516)
Timeout(P. 517)
PCL(P. 517)
Action When Paper Size Mismatch
Set whether printing goes ahead if a paper size other than the size loaded in the paper source is selected. You can also
set the machine not to go ahead with printing and instead display an alert message. When an Error Message
Appears(P. 549)
Force Output
Display Error
Setting Menu List
513
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Action When Paper Size Mismatch> Select <Force Output> or
<Display Error>
Mobile Print Halftones
Select the image processing when printing from a mobile device. Select <Gradation> for photos and illustrations, and
<Error Diffusion> for mostly text documents for more attractive printouts.
Gradation
Error Diffusion
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Mobile Print Halftones> Select <Gradation> or <Error Diffusion>
Copies *1
Set the number of copies to print.
1 to 999
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of copies to print <Apply>
2-Sided Printing *1
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
Off
On
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
514
Default Paper *1
Use this item to specify the paper size. Paper(P. 649)
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the paper size
Print Quality
You can change settings related to print quality.
Density *1
Adjust the toner density.
17 Levels
Fine Adjust
High
17 Levels
Medium
17 Levels
Low
17 Levels
●The settings specied for <Density> are disabled when <Toner Save> is enabled.
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>
Toner Save
You can save toner consumption. Select <On> when you want to check the layout or other appearance
characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.
Off
On
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner Save> Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
515
Special Print Mode *1
Select <Special Settings 1> if a printed bar code is unreadable, or <Special Settings 2> if print results are partially
faded.
Off
Special Settings 1
Special Settings 2
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Special Print Mode> Select <Special Settings
1> or <Special Settings 2>
Resolution *1
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
1200 dpi
600 dpi
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Resolution> Select <1200 dpi> or <600
dpi>
Density Fine Adjustment *1
Finely adjust the density. You can specify this setting only when <1200 dpi> is selected in <Resolution>.
-1 to 0 to 1
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density Fine Adjustment> Specify the density
Layout *1
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position.
Binding Location
If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on
the long or short edge.
Long Edge
Short Edge
Setting Menu List
516
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding Location> Select <Long Edge> or <Short
Edge>
<Long Edge>
Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.
<Short Edge>
Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.
Timeout *1
Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception
interruption.
5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time period <Apply>
PCL *1
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
Paper Save
Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine will
not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you
have inserted in your document, select <Off>.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
517
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select <Off> or <On>
Orientation
Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
Portrait
Landscape
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select <Portrait> or <Landscape>
Font Number
Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font
samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 617)
0 to 54
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font Number> Select the font number
<Apply>
Point Size
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionally-
spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify the point size <Apply>
Pitch
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only
when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
Setting Menu List
518
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the pitch value <Apply>
Form Lines *2
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to
the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 60 to 128 (lines)
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form Lines> Specify the number of lines
<Apply>
Character Code
Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting is
ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.
DESKTOP
ISO4
ISO6
ISO11
ISO15
ISO17
ISO21
ISO60
ISO69
ISOL1
ISOL2
ISOL5
ISOL6
LEGAL
MATH8
MCTEXT
MSPUBL
PC775
PC8
PC850
PC852
PC8DN
PC8TK
PC1004
PIFONT
PSMATH
PSTEXT
ROMAN8
VNINTL
VNMATH
VNUS
WIN30
WINBALT
WINL1
WINL2
WINL5
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character Code> Select the character code
Custom Paper
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and
<Y dimension>.
Setting Menu List
519
Off
On
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom Paper> Select <Off> or <On>
Unit of Measure *2
Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.
Millimeters
Inches
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of Measure> Select <Millimeters> or
<Inches>
X dimension
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
3 to 8 1/2 (inches) or 77 to 216 (mm)
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>
Y dimension
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
5 to 14 (inches) or 127 to 356 (mm)
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>
Append CR to LF
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is
selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If
<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
Setting Menu List
520
Yes
No
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to LF> Select <Yes> or <No>
Enlarge A4 Print Width
Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR
size.
Off
On
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print Width> Select <Off> or <On>
Halftones
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of
image.
Text
Color Tone
Gradation
Resolution
Graphics
Color Tone
Gradation
Resolution
Image
Color Tone
Gradation
Resolution
Setting Menu List
521
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> Select the type of image Select the
halftone reproduction method
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<Color Tone>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
<Resolution>
Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.
Setting Menu List
522
Adjustment/Maintenance
1469-095
All the settings about adjustment and maintenance are listed with short
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.(P. 523)
Toner Save(P. 523)
Special Processing(P. 524)
Clean Fixing Assembly(P. 528)
Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridges is low.
Auto
Custom
10 to 20 to 99 (%)
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.> <Custom>
Enter the toner cartridge level <Apply>
Toner Save
Select whether to reduce toner consumption when copying or faxing.
Copy
Off
On
Fax
Off
On
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Toner Save> Select <Copy> or <Fax> <On>
Setting Menu List
523
When set to <On>
Fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.
Special Processing
If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the
printouts.
Special Printing Mode U
If toner appears splattered around text and patterns in a printout, select <On>.
Off
On
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode U>
<On>
When set to <On>
Print quality can be affected by the type of paper (especially lightweight paper) and the printing environment
(especially high humidity).
Special Printing Mode V
Adjust this setting if the print paper curls or wrinkles.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode V>
Select the mode
Setting Menu List
524
To enable the setting
This setting is enabled in the following conditions.
●The paper size is set to <B5>, <A5>, <STMT>, or <EXEC>
●<Paper Type> is set to <Plain (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, <Plain L (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, <Recycled (16 lb
Bond-23 lb Bond)>, <Color (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, or <Envelope>
After the setting is enabled
Print speed is slower.
Special Printing Mode X
Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode X>
Select the mode
Special Printing Mode Z
Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper output when copying or faxing.
Copy
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
Fax
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode Z>
Select <Copy> or <Fax> Select the mode
Setting Menu List
525
After the setting is changed
By specifying <Off> or <Mode 1>, streaks may adhere to the print paper. By specifying <Mode 3> or <Mode 4>,
outlines may be blurred or images may appear somewhat grainy. The print density becomes lighter as the
setting progresses from <Off> to <Mode 4>.
After printing from a smartphone or tablet
If streaks adhere to the paper, change the setting with <Special Printing Mode Z> <Copy>.
Special Printing Mode B
Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper after replacing the toner cartridge or after not printing
for a long period of time.
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode B>
Select the mode
After the setting is enabled
Print speed is slower.
Special Printing Mode C
Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper when printing out received faxes.
Off
On
Setting Menu List
526
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode C>
<On>
After the setting is enabled
●While more effect is gained than with <Special Printing Mode Z>, print speed is slower.
Special Printing Mode D
Adjust this setting if streaks adhere to the print paper. Also, setting this item to <On> will reduce the operating
noise during printing.
Copy
Off
On
Print
Off
On
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode D>
Select <Copy> or <Print> <On>
After the setting is enabled
●While more effect is gained than with <Special Printing Mode Z>, print speed is slower.
After printing from a smartphone or tablet
If streaks adhere to the paper, change the setting with <Special Printing Mode D> <Copy>.
Special Printing Mode I
Only select <On> if paper jams frequently when performing 2-sided printing on lightweight paper or on curled
paper.
Off
On
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode I>
<On>
Setting Menu List
527
When set to <On>
White patches may appear in images printed on paper other than lightweight paper.
Special Printing Mode J
If printing is uneven when printing ne lines or faint images, select <On>.
Off
On
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode J> <On>
When set to <On>.
The following may occur.
●Denition may be affected
●Toner appears in non-print areas when using a new toner cartridge
●Toner cartridge may be used up more quickly
Special Printing Mode K
If toner does not adhere adequately and printouts are faded, select <On>.
Off
On
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode K>
<On>
When set to <On>
Print speed is slower.
Clean Fixing Assembly
Clean the xing unit after a toner cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on printouts. Fixing
Assembly(P. 595)
Setting Menu List
528
System Management Settings
1469-096
All the settings about System Management Settings are listed with short
descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed
●Enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Asterisks (*)
●Settings marked with "*1" have different defaults depending on your country or region.
●Settings marked with "*2" are only available for the MF249dw / MF247dw.
Network Settings(P. 529)
System Manager Information Settings(P. 529)
Device Information Settings(P. 530)
Security Settings(P. 530)
Select Country/Region(P. 531)
Remote UI Settings(P. 531)
Auto Online for Remote Scan(P. 532)
Restrict TX Function(P. 532)
Display Job Log(P. 533)
Use as USB Device(P. 533)
Enable Product Extended Survey Program(P. 533)
Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)(P. 534)
Google Cloud Print Settings(P. 534)
Import/Export Address Book(P. 534)
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)(P. 535)
Update Firmware(P. 536)
Initialize Address Book(P. 536)
Initialize Eco Report Counter(P. 536)
Initialize Menu(P. 536)
Initialize All Data/Settings(P. 537)
Network Settings
See Network Settings (P. 473) .
System Manager Information Settings
Specify the PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System
Management Settings>. You can set the PIN from <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an
Administrator. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
Setting Menu List
529
System Manager PIN
Enter a number of up to seven digits for the System Manager PIN.
System Manager Name
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
Device Information Settings
Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
Device Name
Location
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select <Device
Name> or <Location> Enter <Device Name> or <Location> ( Entering Text(P. 38) ) <Apply>
Security Settings
Enable or disable settings for IP address or MAC address packet ltering.
Use TLS
Select whether to use TLS encrypted communication. Enabling TLS Encrypted Communication for the
Remote UI(P. 426)
Off
On
IPv4 Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 402)
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv4 Address Filter>
<Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
530
IPv6 Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 402)
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv6 Address Filter>
<Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
MAC Address Filter
Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Rules(P. 406)
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <MAC Address Filter>
<Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
Select Country/Region *1
Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
United States (US)
Canada (CA)
Brazil (BR)
Mexico (MX)
Other
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Select Country/Region> Select a country or
region
Remote UI Settings
Congure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web
browser.
Setting Menu List
531
Use Remote UI
Select whether to use the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a
Web browser. Disabling Remote UI (P. 424)
Off
On
Remote UI Access Security Settings
Set whether a PIN is required for accessing the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a common
PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN (P. 399)
Off
On
Remote UI Access PIN
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI Access Security
Settings> <On> Enter PIN PIN (Conrm) <Apply>
Auto Online for Remote Scan
Select whether to use this feature to go online for remote scanning, even without using the operation panel.
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Auto Online for Remote Scan> Select <Off> or
<On>
Restrict TX Function
Specify settings for restricting access to sending functions for selected destinations.
Address Book PIN
Specify a PIN and require entering it to add new entries to or edit existing entries in the Address Book.
Setting a PIN for Address Book(P. 415)
Restrict New Destinations
Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail addresses that can be specied as destinations to those
already registered in the Address Book. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
Off
On
Setting Menu List
532
Restrict Resending from Log
Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs. Disabling Use of
Previously Used Destinations(P. 419)
Off
On
One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation
Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.
Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 420)
Off
On
Display Job Log
Select whether to display the faxing logs on the display of the machine and in the Communication Management
Report.
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Display Job Log> Select <Off> or <On>
Use as USB Device
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer.
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Use as USB Device> Select <Off> or <On>
Restart the machine
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
Off
On
Setting Menu List
533
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Enable Product Extended Survey Program> Select
<Off> or <On>
Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)
Off
On
Toner Status Settings
Off
On
Displ. Purchase Button
Off
On
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)> Select
<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)> or <Toner Status Settings> Select <Off> or <On>
If you selected <On> for <Toner Status Settings>, continue by selecting <On> or <Off> for <Displ. Purchase
Button>.
Google Cloud Print Settings
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 308)
Enable Google Cloud Print
Off
On
Google Cloud Print Registration Status
Import/Export Address Book
You can import an Address Book from a computer or export an Address Book from the machine. Importing/
Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software(P. 165)
Setting Menu List
534
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play. For more information, see "MF Driver Installation Guide."
Network
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected over the network.
FAX
UFRII LT
UFRII LT (V4)
PCL6*2
USB
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB.
UFRII LT
UFRII LT (V4)
PCL6*2
Any setting change is enabled the next time the main power is turned ON.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select <Network>
or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
<FAX>
Detects and connects the machine as a fax device.
<UFRII LT>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer.
<UFRII LT (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).
Setting Menu List
535
<PCL6>*2
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
Update Firmware
Select how to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine.
●<Via PC>
Select to manually install the rmware update available on the Canon Web site yourself. For instructions on
how to install the update, see the instruction manual available on the Web site. When the machine uses a
wireless LAN, update with <Via Internet> below or use a USB cable to connect.
●<Via Internet>
Select to automatically install the rmware update without using a computer. Follow the on-screen
instructions to perform the update. The machine must be connected to the Internet.
●<Version Information>
Select to check details for the current rmware.
Via PC
Via Internet
Version Information
Initialize Address Book
Select to restore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults. Initializing Address Book (P. 625)
Initialize Eco Report Counter
Select to restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults. Initialize Eco Report Counter(P. 626)
Initialize Menu
Select to restore the settings to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings at once. Initializing
Menu(P. 623)
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings*2
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
Scan Settings
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintenance
System Management Settings
Initialize All
System Management Settings
Select to restore the System Management Settings to the factory defaults. You can restore all the System
Management Settings at once. Initializing Menu(P. 623)
Setting Menu List
536
Network Settings
System Manager Information Settings
Device Information Settings
Security/Remote UI Settings
Auto Online for Remote Scan
Restrict TX Function
Display Job Log
Use as USB Device
Enable Product Extended Survey Program
Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)
Google Cloud Print Settings
PDL Selection (Plug and Play)
Initialize All
Initialize All Data/Settings
Delete all data on the machine and return it to its factory default settings.
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes> <Yes>
Restart the machine
Setting Menu List
537
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 539
Clearing Jams ..................................................................................................................................................... 541
When an Error Message Appears ..................................................................................................................... 549
When an Error Code Appears ............................................................................................................................ 559
Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 565
Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 566
Copy/Printing Problems ............................................................................................................................... 570
Faxing/Telephone Problems ......................................................................................................................... 573
When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 575
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 577
Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 582
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 584
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 586
Troubleshooting
538
Troubleshooting
1469-097
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.
◼Paper Jams
If a document or paper jams, see Clearing Jams(P. 541) to remove the jammed paper.
◼A Message or Error Code Appears
If the screen displays a message or error code (three digits), see the following sections.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 549)
When an Error Code Appears(P. 559)
◼Common Problems
If you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning, see the following sections before contacting Canon.
Common Problems(P. 565)
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
Copy/Printing Problems(P. 570)
Faxing/Telephone Problems(P. 573)
◼Printing Results are Not Satisfactory
If printing results are not satisfactory, see When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 575) .
◼When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 586) to nd out where to contact.
Troubleshooting
539
Troubleshooting
540
Clearing Jams
1469-098
If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen. Tap <Next> to display simple solutions. If it is dicult to
understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
MF249dw
●<Open the feeder cover.>
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF249dw)(P. 542)
●<Close the upper area.> <Lift the control panel.>
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 544)
MF247dw / MF236n
●<Open the feeder cover.>
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF247dw / MF236n)(P. 543)
●<Close the upper area.> <Lift the control panel.>
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 544)
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed. Be especially careful when receiving fax
documents.
If paper tears
Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
If paper jams repeatedly
●Make sure that the paper and the packing material are completely removed.
●Tap the paper stack on a at surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
●Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.
Paper(P. 649)
●Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.
Troubleshooting
541
Do not forcibly remove the jammed document or paper from the machine
Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 586)
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF249dw)
If there are documents placed in the feeder, remove them rst. Then, follow the procedure below.
1Remove the jammed document from the feeder cover.
1Open the feeder cover.
2Move the lever to unlock.
3Gently pull out the document.
2Remove the jammed document from the inner cover inside the feeder.
1Hold the green knob, and open the inner cover.
Troubleshooting
542
2Gently pull out the document.
3Close the inner cover.
3Return the lever back in place, and close the feeder cover.
Document Jams in the Feeder (MF247dw / MF236n)
If there are documents placed in the feeder, remove them rst. Then, follow the procedure below.
1Open the feeder cover.
Troubleshooting
543
2Gently pull out the document.
3Close the feeder cover.
Paper Jams inside the Machine
1Remove the toner cartridge.
1Lift the operation panel.
The operation panel cannot be opened if the feeder is not completely closed. Forcing the operation panel
up may cause damage.
2Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.
3Remove the toner cartridge.
Troubleshooting
544
2Gently pull out the document.
3Check whether paper is jammed inside the paper exit guide.
1Pull out toward you while pressing the button ( ) to open the paper exit guide.
2Gently pull out the document.
3Close the paper exit guide.
4Check whether paper is jammed inside the machine.
Troubleshooting
545
1Gently pull out any paper between the xing assembly ( ) and roller ( ) until you can see the edge of
the paper.
2Once the edge of the paper is visible, pull it out slowly.
5Check whether paper is jammed in the manual feed slot or paper drawer.
1Slowly pull out any paper in the manual feed slot.
2Open the paper cover and remove any loaded paper.
3Gently pull out the document.
Troubleshooting
546
4Load paper and close the paper cover.
●For MF236n, proceed to step 7.
6Check whether paper is jammed inside the rear cover.
1Open the rear cover.
2Gently pull out the document.
3Close the rear cover.
7Install the toner cartridge.
●Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.
Troubleshooting
547
8Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.
If you cannot close the toner cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.
Troubleshooting
548
When an Error Message Appears
1469-099
If you cannot send a fax or the memory is full, or you encounter operation problems, a message appears on the
display. Find out more information about messages in the following list.
A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in use. The amount remaining
in the cartridge cannot be displayed correctly.
You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.
●We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 658)
Cannot change the destination type of any destination that is registered to a
group.
A selected destination could not be edited because it was registered to Group Dial.
●To change the type of destination that is registered to Group Dial, rst delete the registered destination
from Group Dial. Next, change the destination type, and then register the destination to Group Dial again.
Cannot export. An error has been detected during le creation.
Exporting the address book failed.
●Check the USB cable connecting the machine to a computer.
●Check if you have access permission to the destination folder of the address book on the computer.
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software(P. 165)
You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission to the destination folder of
the address book. If you do not have permission, log on as a user with access privileges, or change the
destination for saving the address book.
Cannot nd the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a
specic period of time.
●Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 321)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 323)
An SSID of a wireless router was entered, but the entry was incorrect.
●Check the SSID and enter the correct one again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
Troubleshooting
549
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
●If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cannot import. A le error has been detected.
Importing the address book failed.
●Check the USB cable connecting the machine to a computer.
●Check if the contents of address book to be imported is correct.
Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software(P. 165)
Cannot print RX data.
A received document cannot be printed due to the following:
●Replacement period of the toner cartridge is near.
●A cover is opened.
●A toner cartridge is not set.
●Paper is not set.
●A document or paper jams.
●An abnormality occurs.
●Check whether the problems above are occurring. If messages including causes and solutions appear on
the display, check the contents.
Cannot receive the fax. Make sure the fax was sent correctly by the sender.
The recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
●Ask the sender to send the fax again. If you hear a beep, tap <Start Receiving> to receive the fax.
Receiving Faxes(P. 142)
Cannot send because more than one destination is specied.
Sending a fax to multiple destinations is disabled.
●To specify multiple destinations, you need to set <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> to <Off> or <Conrm
Sequential Broadcast>. For more information, contact your Administrator.
Prohibiting Sequential Broadcasting(P. 422)
Troubleshooting
550
Cannot specify a group.
Group Dial was specied as a destination after pressing <Hook>.
●Once you tap <Hook>, you cannot specify destinations in Group Dial. Tap <End> on the <Specify
destination.> screen, and specify destinations to send fax documents without tapping <Hook>.
Cannot use Google Cloud Print. Server authentication failed.
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
●Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specied.
Date/Time Settings(P. 489)
Cannot use Google Cloud Print. Server communication error.
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN or wired LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
●A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a rewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
●If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy (P. 411)
Cart. Communication Error A counterfeit or non-Canon cartridge may be in
use.
Toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.
●Reinstall the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner
cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the shop where you purchased the machine, or the Canon
Customer Care Center.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.
●We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 658)
Cartridge has reached end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
Troubleshooting
551
●Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the
RADIUS server.
●Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the
correct authentication method.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
●Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
●If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
Could not connect using Access Point Mode.
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
●Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, try switching the machine off briey.
Make Direct Connection (Access Point Mode) (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 291)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON,
then congure the settings again.
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
●Restart the machine and set again.
●If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed
and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
●If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the
wireless router.
Troubleshooting
552
Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congure the settings
again.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
●Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
It was not possible to detect any mobile device within the predetermined length of time.
●Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 291)
Could not perform cleaning.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
●Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 544)
Fixing Assembly(P. 595)
Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
●Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
●Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
●Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Troubleshooting
553
Direct Connection terminated.
Connection between the machine and the mobile device was terminated.
●Reestablish Direct Connection.
Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 291)
Insert the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge is not set or properly set.
●Properly set the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
Maximum number of wireless devices connected using Direct Connection
has been reached. To connect other devices, terminate some of the current
connections.
The number of directly connected mobile devices is at a maximum.
●To connect other devices by Direct Connection, disconnect current device(s) and try connecting again.
Using the Machine in Direct Connection (in Access Point Mode)(P. 291)
No Paper: XXXX*
* <Drawer 1> or <MP Tray> is displayed for XXXX.
Paper is not loaded in the paper drawer or the manual feed slot.
●Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
●Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
Paper on which received documents can be printed is not loaded.
●Received documents can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its
size. Also, set the paper type to <Plain (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, <Plain L (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>,
<Recycled (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, or <Color (16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)> depending on the loaded paper.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
If you print received documents on paper other than A4 or Letter size, some portions of the image may be
missing or the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.
Troubleshooting
554
No reply from the destination.
A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
●Check the status of the network cables and switches.
No response from the host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
●Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Connecting to a Network(P. 315)
Paper jammed.
Paper jams.
●Remove the jammed paper or document, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Jams(P. 541)
Prepare a cartridge.
The toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon.
●Shake the toner cartridge to evenly distribute the toner inside the toner cartridge. It is recommended to
replace the toner cartridge when printing a large volume of documents.
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 601)
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Set the correct authentication information.
The client authentication information (key pair and certicate, user name and password, or CA
certicate) is not set correctly.
●Check the specied authentication method and authentication information (key pair and certicate, user
name and password, and CA certicate).
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
Size/Settings Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
●Match the paper size setting specied in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.
Troubleshooting
555
To use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Specifying and registering new destinations is restricted.
Only destinations that are registered in the Address Book can be specied to send a fax or e-mail.
●To enter a new destination with the operation panel, or add or edit it in the Address Book, you need to set
<Restrict New Destinations> to <Off>. For more information, contact your Administrator.
Limiting Available Destinations(P. 417)
The amount in the cartridge cannot be displayed correctly.
Toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.
●Reinstall the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner
cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the shop where you purchased the machine, or the Canon
Customer Care Center.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.
●We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 658)
The connection with the PC has been lost. Check the connection.
The connection to the computer was lost during a scan.
●Check the connection between the machine and the computer.
Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner (P. 233)
The memory is full.
A fax could not be sent or received, or a document could not be scanned due to insucient memory
space.
●If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
●If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it.
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)(P. 150)
●If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
Troubleshooting
556
●If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document.
Adjusting Resolution(P. 134)
●If scanning, change the le format to reduce its le size.
Selecting a File Format(P. 262)
The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?
A document could not be scanned due to insucient memory space.
●Select whether to print up to the scanned pages or to cancel the scanning. If you cancel, divide the
document into multiple sections and scan them, or change the scanning settings.
The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are used.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
●Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
●Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
●Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
●Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
●Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.
Troubleshooting
557
●Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
●If using TLS, check whether a key pair is registered.
●If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication(P. 429)
Troubleshooting
558
When an Error Code Appears
1469-09A
If printing is not successful or you cannot send or receive a fax or scanned document, or another error occurs, that
error appears on a report or a message on the <Status Monitor> screen as a three-digit number (error code). Check
the following to nd out causes and solutions for each error code. For how to print an error report and information in
the report, see Printing Reports and Lists(P. 608) .
#001
A document jams in the feeder.
●Remove the jammed document.
Clearing Jams(P. 541)
#003
A fax could not be sent or received due to its large data size.
●When sending a fax: Reduce the resolution, and scan the document.
Adjusting Resolution(P. 134)
●When receiving a fax: Ask the sender to divide the document into multiple sections or reduce the
resolution before sending.
#005
A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
●When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to
check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
#012
A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine ran out of paper.
●Ask the recipient to reload the paper.
Troubleshooting
559
#018
A fax could not be sent since the recipient's machine did not respond because the line was busy or for
other reasons.
●When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to
check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
#022
Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled.
●To send a fax from a computer, you need to set <Allow Fax Driver TX> to <On>. For more information,
contact your Administrator.
Prohibiting PC Faxing(P. 418)
A fax could not be forwarded because the specied destination was deleted from the Address Book.
●Register the forwarding destination again. If the documents that failed to be forwarded remain in
memory, you can forward it again.
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 158)
#037
Memory is full.
●If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.
●If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it.
Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)(P. 150)
●If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.
●If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document.
Adjusting Resolution(P. 134)
#054
A fax could not be sent because the specied destination fax number exceeded 40 digits.
●Specify the destination fax number within 40 digits.
#099
Printing, sending, or receiving was canceled.
Troubleshooting
560
●When you cancel an operation, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print, send, or receive
documents again as necessary.
#752
E-mail sending was impossible because an incorrect SMTP server name was set.
●Check the SMTP server name, and correct the setting.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 359)
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
E-mail sending was impossible because an incorrect domain name was set.
●Check the domain name, and correct the setting.
Conguring DNS(P. 377)
E-mail sending was impossible because the machine was not connected to a network correctly.
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
#753
Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or stored in the shared folder because the LAN cable is
disconnected.
●Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
#755
Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or stored in the shared folder because TCP/IP was not working
correctly.
●Check <TCP/IP Settings>, and set correctly.
Network Settings (P. 473)
An IP address is not set.
●Set the IP address correctly.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 336)
The machine cannot communicate with devices on a network immediately after the machine starts up
because the waiting time for the start of the communication is set.
●The machine cannot start communicating immediately after it is turned ON. Wait until the set time for
<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup> passes after turning ON the machine, and send again.
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 376)
#801
When communicating with an SMTP server to send an e-mail, a timeout error occurred from the server.
Troubleshooting
561
●Check whether SMTP is running on the network correctly.
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
When communicating with the SMTP server, an error returned from the server.
●Check whether the SMTP server is set correctly.
A destination is not set correctly.
●Check whether the destination is set correctly.
When storing a scanned document into the shared folder, an error occurred from the folder.
●Check whether the shared folder and the computer that has the shared folder are running correctly.
The incorrect folder name or password was specied when storing to the shared folder.
●Check the destination settings.
#802
The SMTP/POP3 server name is not set correctly.
●Set the SMTP/POP3 server name correctly.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 359)
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
#804
No access privileges to access the shared folder are granted.
●Grant the sending user (user name registered to the destination) a privilege for writing to the save
location folder. For details, contact your network administrator.
The incorrect folder name was specied when storing to the shared folder.
●Check the destination settings.
#806
When storing data to a shared folder, an incorrect user name or password was specied.
●The same user name and password as those registered in a shared folder must be registered in the
Address Book.
Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 368)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
When sending an e-mail, an incorrect destination was specied.
●Enter the correct e-mail address, and send the message again. If the destination that was registered in the
Address Book was used, check whether the e-mail address is correct.
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Troubleshooting
562
#810
When communicating with the POP3 server to send e-mail, an error returned from the server.
●Check whether the POP3 server is set correctly.
●Check whether your mail server and network are running correctly. For more information, contact your
Network Administrator.
#813
The logon name or password that is used on the POP3 server is not set correctly.
●Correctly enter the logon name or password that is used on the POP3 server.
#839
A user name and password that are used for SMTP authentication are not set correctly.
●Set the user name and password correctly.
Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 359)
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
#841
When sending an e-mail, an encryption algorithm that is common to the mail server is not present.
●Clear the [Use TLS for SMTP] check box for the SMTP server.
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
●Add the common encryption algorithm to the mail server settings.
When verifying a TLS server certicate to communicate to the SMTP server, a verication error occurred.
●Check that the CA certicate that signed the TLS server certicate on the SMTP server side is registered to
the machine by using the Remote UI.
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
●Check that the TLS server certicate on the SMTP server side is valid.
●Check that the TLS server certicate is not a self-signed certicate.
#844
TLS encrypted communication to a POP3 server failed when sending an e-mail with POP before SMTP.
●Check the TLS encrypted communication settings in the POP3 server.
●Clear the [Use TLS for POP] check box for the POP3 server. If the problem persists, clear the [Use POP
Authentication Before Sending] check box, and set the communication setting to a setting other than POP
before SMTP.
Troubleshooting
563
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
When verifying a TLS server certicate to communicate to the POP3 server, a verication error occurred.
●Check that the CA certicate that signed the TLS server certicate on the POP3 server side is registered to
the machine by using the Remote UI.
Verifying Key Pairs and Digital Certicates(P. 446)
●Check that the TLS server certicate on the POP3 server side is valid.
●Check that the TLS server certicate is not a self-signed certicate.
#846
An e-mail could not be sent due to a POP authentication failure.
●Check the setting, and try again.
Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 363)
#852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
●Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet rmly.
#995
A document waiting to be sent was canceled.
●Send the document again as necessary.
Troubleshooting
564
Common Problems
1469-09C
If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the
problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Check the Following
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
●If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected
correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.
Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
Are the phone cord, LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?
●Check whether these cables are connected correctly. Use care not to mistake the phone cord's port for the
other cables' ports.
Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 112)
Parts and Their Functions(P. 17)
Is sleep mode activated?
●If you leave the machine unattended for a specic period of time, it enters sleep mode for power
conservation, not allowing you to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press .
Is any message displayed on the screen?
●If a problem occurs, a message is displayed.
When an Error Message Appears(P. 549)
If a Problem Persists Even after Checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 566)
Copy/Printing Problems(P. 570)
Faxing/Telephone Problems(P. 573)
Troubleshooting
565
Installation/Settings Problems
1469-09E
See Common Problems(P. 565) also.
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection (P. 566)
Problem with the USB Connection(P. 569)
Problem with the Print Server (P. 569)
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection
The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.
●The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the
same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
●Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication (P. 423)
Disabling Remote UI (P. 424)
●If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi indicator is lit and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Operation Panel(P. 25)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
●If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected rmly and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 318)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
●Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do
not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.
●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to
set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (P. 401)
IPv4 Address Filter (P. 530)
IPv6 Address Filter (P. 531)
MAC Address Filter (P. 531)
A connection to a network cannot be established.
●The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 336)
●When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 567)
Troubleshooting
566
You are unsure of the set IP address. Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a
wireless LAN.
●Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is
required to have the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 317)
You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be
connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.
●Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.
●Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access
point list.
●Check whether the SSID is correct.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 333)
●If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless
router.
* A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.
●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 567)
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup
router is connected to a network).
●If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast
packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are
correct.
●If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even
if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
●If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the
devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings
are correct.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
●Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?
●Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)
correctly plugged in?
●Is the wireless router turned on?
Troubleshooting
567
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
●Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
●Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
●If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
●Is the machine too far from the wireless router?
●Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
●Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that
emit radio waves near the machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 321)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 323)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 326)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329)
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN
connection ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 329) ).
●ANY connection refusal* is activated.
●The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
●The stealth mode is activated.
* A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"
or is blank.
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
●The MAC address packet ltering is set.
Troubleshooting
568
●When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2
encryption method is set to TKIP.
Problem with the USB Connection
Cannot communicate.
●Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.
●If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.
Problem with the Print Server
You cannot nd the print server to connect to.
●Are the print server and computer connected correctly?
●Is the print server running?
●Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.
●Is [Network discovery] enabled? (Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 667)
You cannot connect to a shared printer.
●On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,
contact the network or server administrator.
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 668)
Troubleshooting
569
Copy/Printing Problems
1469-09F
See Common Problems(P. 565) also.
Printing/copy results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When You
Cannot Print Properly(P. 575)
You cannot print.
●Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the
machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 669)
If you cannot print a test page, check the following according to your environment.
Wireless LAN connection (MF249dw / MF247dw)
●Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
If the connection is poor, try the following.
●Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to be
at least ve channels apart.
●If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.
●If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same
wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 344)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected(P. 674)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 319)
When you reset wireless LAN connection settings
●As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.
●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 672)
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 351)
●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,
you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4
Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (P. 401)
IPv4 Address Filter (P. 530)
IPv6 Address Filter (P. 531)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide.
●Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Wired LAN connection
Troubleshooting
570
●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 672)
Conguring Printer Ports(P. 351)
●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation
panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls (P. 401)
IPv4 Address Filter (P. 530)
IPv6 Address Filter (P. 531)
MAC Address Filter (P. 531)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide.
●Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
USB connection
●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer driver
in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port
is created automatically.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 672)
●Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 673)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Connect to another USB port on the computer.
●Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Via print server
●Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between
the print server and your computer.
Problem with the Print Server (P. 569)
●Disable security software and other resident software.
●Reinstall the printer driver in accordance with the MF Driver Installation Guide.
●Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Printing seems to be slow. *
●Print or delete data in memory.
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 151)
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 151)
* When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer
does. There is nothing abnormal.
Troubleshooting
571
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 308)
It takes a long time before printing starts.
●Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to
maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the
machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.
A blank sheet is output (nothing is printed).
●Did you pull the sealing tape out when loading the toner cartridge? If you did not pull it out, remove the
toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape out, and reload the toner cartridge.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
Troubleshooting
572
Faxing/Telephone Problems
1469-09H
See Common Problems(P. 565) also.
Sending Problems(P. 573)
Receiving Problems(P. 574)
Sending Problems
A fax cannot be sent.
●Is an external phone line busy? Wait until the line becomes free.
●Has an error occurred? Print and check a Communication Management Report.
Communication Management Report(P. 612)
●Is a telephone line set correctly?
Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 112)
●When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.
Sending Faxes(P. 114)
A fax cannot be sent with a destination in the history specied.
●Did you turn OFF the machine? If so, the stored history was deleted.
●Did you set <Restrict New Destinations> to <On>? If so, the history before you set was deleted.
●Did you set <Restrict Resending from Log> to <On>? If so, the destinations in the history cannot be specied.
A fax cannot be sent on an optical ber line.
●The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical ber line or IP phone line, the
machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a
case, contact the provider of the optical ber line or IP phone.
The results of a sent fax are not satisfactory.
●Clean the platen glass or feeder. If cleaning does not improve the results, the recipient's fax machine may be
a cause.
Platen Glass(P. 591)
Feeder(P. 594)
Troubleshooting
573
Receiving Problems
The results of received fax are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When
You Cannot Print Properly(P. 575)
Telephone and fax cannot be switched automatically.
●Check that the receive mode is set to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, <Answering Machine>, or <DRPD: Select Fax>.
Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 110)
●Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 151)
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 151)
A fax cannot be received automatically.
●Check that the receive mode is set to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, <Auto>, <Answering Machine>, or <DRPD:
Select Fax>.
Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 110)
●Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.
Checking/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 151)
Printing Documents in Memory(P. 151)
A fax cannot be received on an optical ber line.
●The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical ber line or IP phone line, the
machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a
case, contact the provider of the optical ber line or IP phone.
Troubleshooting
574
When You Cannot Print Properly
1469-09J
If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Edge of Printouts(P. 577)
Streaks Appear on
Printouts(P. 577)
White Streaks Appear(P. 578)
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear(P. 578)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 579) Printed Pages Have White
Specks(P. 579)
A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed(P. 580)
Print Density Is Uneven(P. 580) Printouts Are Grayish(P. 581)
Troubleshooting
575
Cannot Scan a Printed
Barcode(P. 581)
Paper Creases(P. 582) Paper Curls(P. 582)
Printouts Are Skewed(P. 584) Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More
Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 584)
Paper Jams Frequently with 2-
Sided Printing (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 585)
Troubleshooting
576
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
1469-09K
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine rst.
Cleaning the Machine(P. 589)
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts
Do you print data without margins?
●This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 1/4" (5 mm) or less
around the edge of paper or 3/8" (10 mm) or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the
machine. Make sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Streaks Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 649)
Loading Paper(P. 45)
●If using the appropriate paper still does not solve the problem, change one of the <Special Printing Mode
Z>, <Special Printing Mode C>, and <Special Printing Mode D> settings.
Special Processing (P. 524)
●To print from a computer, change the setting for [Special Print Adjustment] in the printer driver.
[Mode 1] has the least effect while [Mode 4] has the most effect. Try each in order starting with [Mode 1].
Increasing the effect makes the print density lighter. Outlines may also be blurred or images may appear
somewhat grainy.
Troubleshooting
577
Did you just replace the toner cartridge? Have you not used the printer for a
long period of time?
●Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode B>.
Special Processing (P. 524)
White Streaks Appear
Is the platen glass dirty?
●Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.
Platen Glass(P. 591)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?
●Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 649)
Loading Paper(P. 45)
●Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode U>.
Special Processing (P. 524)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?
●Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Troubleshooting
578
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Printouts Are Faded
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?
●Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Paper(P. 649)
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
Are you using the machine in a special environment (in particular, a low-
temperature environment)?
●Toner may not adhere adequately, causing printouts to appear faded. Change the setting for <Special
Printing Mode K>.
Special Processing (P. 524)
Printed Pages Have White Specks
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 649)
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Troubleshooting
579
Is the drum in the toner cartridge deteriorated?
●Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Are you printing a document with strong contrasts?
●Change the setting for [Special Print Mode] using the Printer Driver.
When set to [Special Settings 2], print density is lighter compared with [Off] or [Special Settings 1]. Text and
lines may also appear faded.
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do you print data without margins?
●This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 1/4" (5 mm) or less
around the edge of paper or 3/8" (10 mm) or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the
machine. Make sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]
Print Density Is Uneven
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge nearly empty?
●Check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, and replace the toner cartridges as necessary.
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Is printing sometimes uneven when printing ne lines?
●Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode J>.
Troubleshooting
580
Special Processing (P. 524)
Printouts Are Grayish
Is <Correct Density> in <Copy Settings> set too dark?
●Adjust the setting so that density is lighter.
Correct Density(P. 496)
Is the printer installed where it is subject to direct sunlight or strong light?
●Install the printer in an appropriate location.
Installation(P. 3)
Relocating the Machine(P. 606)
Was the toner cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time?
●Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This
may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Cannot Scan a Printed Barcode
Are you trying to scan a barcode printed with factory default settings?
●In the printer driver, specify [Special Settings 1] for the setting of [Special Print Mode].
●When set to [Special Settings 1], print density is lighter compared with [Off]. Text and lines may also
appear faded.
●White specks may appear in images when this feature is used with paper other than lightweight paper.
Troubleshooting
581
Paper Creases or Curls
1469-09L
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
●If paper is not loaded below the load limit guide or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
●Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Paper(P. 649)
●If the problem persists after using appropriate paper, change the setting for <Special Printing Mode V>.
Special Processing (P. 524)
Paper Curls
Are you using appropriate paper?
●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Paper(P. 649)
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Troubleshooting
582
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
●If using plain paper (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²)), making the following change in the printer driver
may solve the problem.
[Page Setup] tab [Paper Type] [Plain L [60-89 g/m2]]
●If the use of the appropriate paper does not solve the problem, change the setting for <Special Printing
Mode V>.
Special Processing(P. 524)
Troubleshooting
583
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
1469-09R
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
●If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Is the paper source the manual feed slot?
●Load the paper into the paper drawer.
Loading Paper in the Paper Drawer(P. 47)
Are you printing on curled envelopes?
●Uncurl the envelopes, and print again.
Loading Envelopes(P. 52)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
●Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.
●Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper(P. 45)
●Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is
used.
Paper(P. 649)
Troubleshooting
584
Loading Paper(P. 45)
●Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
Paper Jams Frequently with 2-Sided Printing (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Does paper jam frequently especially with lightweight paper or curled paper
during 2-sided printing?
●Set <Special Printing Mode I> to <On>.
Special Processing (P. 524)
Troubleshooting
585
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
1469-09S
If a problem cannot be resolved, contact the following:
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact the Canon Customer Care
Center at 1-800-OK-CANON, Monday through Friday, between 8:00 A.M. and 8:00 P.M. EST. On-line support is
available 24 hours a day at http://www.canontechsupport.com.
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:
●To perform step-by-step troubleshooting, send an e-mail to technical support, download drivers or support
documents, or view answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/.
●Free live technical support is available from 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST, Monday through Friday (excluding holidays),
for products still under warranty 1-800-OK-CANON.
●To nd the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or call 1-800-OK-
CANON.
●If the problem cannot be corrected via these technical support options, repair options are available from the
technical support personnel via the Web site at http://www.canon.ca/.
* Available support options are subject to change without notice.
◼When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the following information ready:
●Product name (MF249dw / MF247dw / MF236n)
●Dealer where you purchased the machine
●Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
●Serial number (eight alphanumeric characters long, found on the label on the back side of the machine)
MF249dw / MF247dw MF236n
Troubleshooting
586
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 588
Cleaning the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 589
Exterior ......................................................................................................................................................... 590
Platen Glass .................................................................................................................................................. 591
Feeder .......................................................................................................................................................... 594
Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 595
Machine Interior ........................................................................................................................................... 596
Replacing Toner Cartridges .............................................................................................................................. 598
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge .......................................................................................................... 601
How to Replace Toner Cartridges ................................................................................................................. 603
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 606
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 608
TX Result Report ........................................................................................................................................... 609
Communication Management Report .......................................................................................................... 612
RX Result Report ........................................................................................................................................... 614
Consumables Status Report ......................................................................................................................... 615
Eco Report .................................................................................................................................................... 616
PCL Font List (MF249dw / MF247dw) ............................................................................................................ 617
Address Book List ......................................................................................................................................... 618
User Data List ............................................................................................................................................... 620
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 621
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 622
Initializing Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 623
Initializing Address Book .............................................................................................................................. 625
Initialize Eco Report Counter ........................................................................................................................ 626
Initializing All Data/Settings .......................................................................................................................... 627
Maintenance
587
Maintenance
1469-09U
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and initialize settings.
◼Basic Cleaning Cleaning the Machine(P. 589)
●The machine becomes dirty Exterior(P. 590)
●Smudge marks appear on originals or printouts Platen Glass(P. 591)
Feeder(P. 594)
●Streaks appear on printouts Fixing Assembly(P. 595)
●The interior of the machine becomes dirty Machine Interior(P. 596)
◼Replacing Toner Cartridges
●If you want to check the remaining toner cartridge level Replacing Toner
Cartridges(P. 598)
●How to replace toner cartridges How to Replace Toner
Cartridges(P. 603)
◼Relocating the Machine
●Relocating the machine for maintenance or an oce move Relocating the
Machine(P. 606)
◼Printing Reports and Lists
●Print out reports describing transmission results, or a list of Address Book information
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 608)
◼Checking the Total Pages Printed by the Machine
If you want to check the total page number of printouts Viewing the Counter Value(P. 621)
◼Initializing Settings
If you want to restore the settings Initializing Settings(P. 622)
Maintenance
588
Cleaning the Machine
1469-09W
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Carefully read the safety instructions before you start cleaning. Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Exterior(P. 590)
Rollers inside the feeder
Feeder(P. 594)
Interior of the machine and xing assembly
Fixing Assembly(P. 595)
Machine Interior(P. 596)
Platen glass and the underside of the feeder
Platen Glass(P. 591)
Maintenance
589
Exterior
1469-09X
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
Ventilation slots are provided only on MF249dw / MF247dw.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
●Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
●To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 18) .
3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
590
Platen Glass
1469-09Y
Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the feeder to prevent smudges to be printed on
documents or printouts.
Scanning area cleaning
To display a message when soiling is detected on the scanning area, set
<Notify to Clean> to <On>.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2Open the feeder.
3Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.
●Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
●In addition to the platen glass and underside of the feeder, make sure to clean and wipe the white strip of
plate ( ) and the surface of the transparent plastic part ( ), too.
Maintenance
591
●When wiping the transparent plastic part ( ), take care not to bend the plastic.
If the problem persists
Remove the transparent plastic part ( ) and wipe it.
1Hold the tabs ( ) at both ends of the transparent plastic part, and remove the plastic part by gently
lifting the rearward end rst.
●The plastic part ( ) is rather damageable. When removing it, be careful not to bend it.
2Wipe the scanning area ( ).
3Wipe the back side of the transparent plastic part.
Maintenance
592
4Wait for the plastic part to dry completely.
5Place the transparent plastic part back into position.
●Make sure of the proper orientation, then hold the tabs and place the plastic part back into position
by gently lowering the frontward end rst.
4Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.
5Gently close the feeder.
6Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
593
Feeder
1469-0A0
Dust and graphite powder may adhere to the roller inside the feeder and cause smudges to appear on printouts. To
clean the feeder, perform the following procedure.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2Open the feeder cover.
MF249dw MF247dw / MF236n
3Wipe roller ( ) inside feeder.
●Clean the areas with a well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.
MF249dw MF247dw / MF236n
4Gently close the feeder cover.
5Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
594
Fixing Assembly
1469-0A1
Dirt may adhere to the xing units inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean the
xing unit, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing unit when the machine has
documents waiting to be printed. To clean the xing unit, you need paper larger than plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set
the paper in the manual feed slot before performing the following procedure.
●Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge. Make sure that there is sucient toner cartridge remaining
beforehand.
●It takes approximately 90 seconds to clean the xing assembly.
Checking Toner cartridge Level(P. 599)
Loading Paper in the Manual Feed Slot(P. 50)
1Press and tap <Menu>.
2Tap <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
3Tap <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4Load paper (A4/LTR or larger) in the manual feed slot, and tap <Start>.
●After cleaning is completed and the message <Finished.> appears, press to return to the <Home>
Screen.
Maintenance
595
Machine Interior
1469-0A2
Clean the interior of the machine regularly so that toner/paper dust does not collect.
1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2Lift the operation panel.
If you cannot lift the operation panel
Make sure the feeder is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass,
remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.
3Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.
4Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.
Maintenance
596
5Using a lint-free clean, soft, dry cloth, wipe away toner/paper dust from the inside.
6Install the toner cartridge.
●Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.
7Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.
If you cannot close the toner cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.
8Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
Maintenance
597
Replacing Toner Cartridges
1469-0A3
The machine will display a message when a toner cartridge is nearly empty. Note that the print quality becomes poor if
you continue printing without taking any action. You can check the remaining toner cartridge level on the display.
When a Message Appear(P. 598)
If Printouts Are Poor in Quality(P. 599)
Checking Toner cartridge Level(P. 599)
◼When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount of remaining toner cartridge. Depending on which message is
displayed, you will need to make sure that you have a replacement toner cartridge ready or replace the toner
cartridge. Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 601) How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
Consumables(P. 658)
<Prepare a cartridge.>
This message noties you that a toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Shake the toner cartridge to evenly
distribute the toner inside the cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to
print a large job.
Specify when this message is displayed
●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers this
message. Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.(P. 523)
<Cartridge has reached end of lifetime. Rplcmt. recommended.>
This message noties you that a toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that you
replace the cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be guaranteed.
●If this message is displayed, the incoming fax will be stored in the memory without being printed.
Also, reports are not printed, even if they are set to be printed automatically.
When a message is displayed
Maintenance
598
●If the message is displayed when the machine is receiving a fax or automatic report output is set, received
faxes and reports will be stored in the machine so that they do not appear faded after they are printed.
●To continue printing even if the toner cartridge is running low, set <Continue Print. When Near Cart. Life
End> to <On>. Continue Print. When Near Cart. Life End (P. 506)
◼If Printouts Are Poor in Quality
If your printouts begin to show any of the following features, one of your toner cartridges is nearly empty. Replace the
nearly empty toner cartridge even if no message is displayed.
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 601)
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
White streaks appear Partially faded Uneven density
Toner smudges and splatters appear Blank space of originals becomes grayish in
printouts
◼Checking Toner cartridge Level
You can check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge according to the following, whenever you want to. It is
recommended that you check the level before you start to print a large job.
<Device Information> <Cartridge Level> Check the amount remaining in the toner
cartridge
Cartridge Level
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of their
lifetime before the toner runs out.
Maintenance
599
●The displayed amount remaining in the toner cartridge can be used only as a guide and may differ
from the actual amount.
LINKS
Consumables(P. 658)
Maintenance
600
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge
1469-0A4
Perform the following before replacing the toner cartridge. The message may no longer appear, or print quality may
be improved. Review cautions for handling the toner cartridge before starting. Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9)
Consumables(P. 10)
1Lift the operation panel.
If you cannot lift the operation panel
Make sure the feeder is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass,
remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.
2Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.
3Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.
Maintenance
601
4Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge.
5Install the toner cartridge.
●Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.
6Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.
If you cannot close the toner cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly.
Forcing it closed may cause damage.
LINKS
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Maintenance
602
How to Replace Toner Cartridges
1469-0A5
Read the precautions in Maintenance and Inspections(P. 9) and Consumables(P. 10) before replacing the toner
cartridges.
1Lift the operation panel.
If you cannot lift the operation panel
Make sure the feeder is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass,
remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.
2Open the toner cover by the grip at the front right of the toner cover.
3Pull the toner cartridge out of the machine.
Maintenance
603
4Remove the replacement toner cartridge from the protective bag.
5Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.
6Pull the sealing tape straight out.
●The full length of the sealing tape is approximately 19 3/4" (50 cm).
When pulling out the sealing tape
If the sealing tape remains inside the toner cartridge, the quality of printouts, including faxes, may
deteriorate. Also note that it will not be possible to reprint a fax because the fax function automatically
deletes data once it is printed.
●Do not pull out the sealing tape at an angle or sideways. If the tape breaks, you may not be able to pull it
out completely.
Maintenance
604
●If the sealing tape becomes stuck when pulling it out, keep pulling until it is completely removed.
7Install the toner cartridge.
●Align the right and left projections ( ) with the toner cartridge guides, and push securely all the way in.
8Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.
If you cannot close the toner cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is inserted properly. Forcing it closed may cause damage.
LINKS
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 601)
Maintenance
605
Relocating the Machine
1469-0A6
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedures below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1Turn OFF the machine and computer.
●When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted. Fax documents that were
received by using the Memory Reception function, faxes that are waiting to be sent, and reports that are
automatically printed after sending and receiving faxes are not deleted.
2Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
●Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB cable*
LAN cable*
External telephone cable*
Telephone cable*
3When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridges.
How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
4Open the paper cover and remove any paper.
●If the paper guides are extended, return them so that they t in the paper drawer.
5Close all the open covers, and move the machine to the new location.
●Check how heavy the machine is and carry it without straining. Machine Specications(P. 644)
Maintenance
606
●Lift by the carrying grips on the front of the machine.
6Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
●For installation steps after moving, see "Getting Started". Manuals Included with the Machine(P. 659)
Maintenance
607
Printing Reports and Lists
1469-0A7
You can check fax results and the machine settings by printing reports and lists.
TX Result Report
You can check the logs of sent documents. TX Result Report(P. 609)
Communication Management Report
You can check the logs of sent and received documents. Communication Management Report(P. 612)
RX Result Report
You can check the logs of received fax documents. RX Result Report(P. 614)
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine. Consumables Status Report(P. 615)
Eco Report
You can check information such as the number of printouts per month and amount of consumed power, and
also check ways to increase savings. Eco Report(P. 616)
PCL Font List (MF249dw / MF247dw)
You can check the list of available fonts for the machine. PCL Font List (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 617)
Address Book List
You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book. Address Book List(P. 618)
User Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 472) ) as well as the content that has been
registered in the machine. User Data List(P. 620)
Maintenance
608
TX Result Report
1469-0A8
You can check the fax or e-mail logs of sent documents as well as documents saved to a shared folder by printing a TX
Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error
occurs.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <Fax TX Result Report> or <E-Mail/File TX Result
Report> Select the print setting
<Off>
Select if you do not want to print TX Result Reports.
<On>
Select to print a TX Result Report every time you send a document.
<Only When Error Occurs>
Select to print a TX Result Report only when a sending error occurs.
Example: Fax sending
Example: Scanning to e-mail/shared folder
Maintenance
609
Result
"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code)
indicates that the transmission failed ( When an Error Code Appears(P. 559) ).
Sent/Error
For e-mail, TX Result Reports indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server, not
between the machine and the destination address. Even if the transmission fails, a three-digit error code will
not be printed. To check the error code, print a Communication Management Report ( Communication
Management Report(P. 612) ).
To print a part of a fax document on the report
When you select <On> or <Only When Error Occurs>, a part of a fax document can be included in the report. Tap
<Include TX Image> to <On>.
Maintenance
610
Maintenance
611
Communication Management Report
1469-0A9
You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication Management
Report. The report can be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it manually.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <Communication Management Report> Select
the print setting
<Auto Print (40 Transmissions)>
Tap <On> to print the report automatically after every 40 transmissions, or <Off> if you do not want to print
the report automatically.
<Separate TX/RX>
Tap <On> to print sent and received reports separately, or <Off> to print both reports on one sheet.
Print the Report Manually
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Communication Management Report> Check that
the size of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
612
Result
"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code)
indicates that the transmission failed ( When an Error Code Appears(P. 559) ). For e-mail, Communication
Management Reports indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server, not
between the machine and the destination address.
Maintenance
613
RX Result Report
1469-0AA
You can check the logs of received fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be printed either
every time a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <RX Result Report> Select the print
setting
<Off>
Select if you do not want to print RX Result Reports.
<On>
Select to print an RX Result Report every time you receive a document.
<Only When Error Occurs>
Select to print an RX Result Report only when a receiving error occurs.
Example:
Result
"OK" indicates that the transmission was completed successfully while "NG" and three digits (an error code)
indicates that the transmission failed ( When an Error Code Appears(P. 559) ).
Maintenance
614
Consumables Status Report
1469-0AC
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Maintenance
615
Eco Report
1469-0E3
You can check information such as the number of printouts per month and amount of consumed power, and also
check ways to increase savings.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Eco Report> Check that the size of paper displayed is
loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
Consumables Status Report(P. 615)
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Maintenance
616
PCL Font List
1469-0AE
You can check the list of available fonts for the machine.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size of paper displayed
on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Example:
Maintenance
617
Address Book List
1469-0AF
You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as <Coded Dial>, <One-Touch>, and <Group Dial>
by printing an Address Book List.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Address Book List> Select the setting you want to
print out Check that the size of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine
<OK> <Yes>
Example: <Coded Dial>
Example: <One-Touch>
Example: <Group Dial>
Maintenance
618
LINKS
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
Maintenance
619
User Data List
1469-0AH
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 472) ) as well as the content that has been registered in
the machine by printing a User Data List. This list includes the paper size and type registered in the machine, the print
settings of <TX Result Report>, <Communication Management Report>, and <RX Result Report>.
<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <User Data List> Check that the size of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Example:
LINKS
TX Result Report(P. 609)
Communication Management Report(P. 612)
RX Result Report(P. 614)
Loading Paper(P. 45)
Maintenance
620
Viewing the Counter Value
1469-0AJ
You can check total for the number of pages used for printouts. This total includes faxes, reports, and lists, in addition
to copies and printouts of data from computers.
<Device Information> <Check Counter>
Maintenance
621
Initializing Settings
1469-0AK
You can restore the following settings:
Initializing Menu(P. 623)
Initializing Address Book (P. 625)
Initialize Eco Report Counter(P. 626)
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 627)
Maintenance
622
Initializing Menu
1469-0AL
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 472) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to restart the machine after initialization.
●If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting
the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you want to
initialize <Yes>
Items for initializing
Select the setting you want to initialize.
When <System Management Settings> is selected
Select the specic system management settings that you want to initialize and tap <Yes>.
Settings to be initialized
Select the settings to be initialized.
Maintenance
623
<Initialize All>
Initializes all the system management settings.
If Remote UI settings are initialized
●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the Remote UI Access PIN.
Setting a Remote UI PIN (P. 399)
●You can use the procedure below to restore the default <Network Settings>.
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart the machine
<Initialize All>
Initializes all the settings.
Maintenance
624
Initializing Address Book
1469-0AR
You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be
deleted after initializing.
If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting the
System Manager PIN(P. 397)
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Address Book> <Yes>
LINKS
Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
Registering Address Book from Remote UI(P. 467)
Maintenance
625
Initialize Eco Report Counter
1469-0E4
You can initialize the number of printouts appearing in the Eco Report and return it to its factory default setting. The
number of printouts returns to 0 after being initialized.
If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and
tap <Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 397)
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize Eco Report Counter> <Yes>
LINKS
Eco Report(P. 616)
Maintenance
626
Initializing All Data/Settings
1469-0AS
To make changes to registered data and settings all at once such as when changing the installation location of the
machine, you can delete registered data (Address Book, etc.) and initialize all settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 472) )
together at the same time. You are required to restart the machine after initializing all data/settings.
If a screen for entering a PIN is displayed, enter the PIN with the numeric keys and tap <Apply>. Setting the
System Manager PIN(P. 397)
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Initialize All Data/Settings> <Yes> <Yes> and
restart the machine.
Maintenance
627
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 629
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 630
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 631
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 632
Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 635
Going Digital ................................................................................................................................................ 637
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 640
Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 643
Machine Specications ................................................................................................................................. 644
Wireless LAN Specications (MF249dw / MF247dw) ...................................................................................... 646
Document Type ............................................................................................................................................ 647
Scan Area ............................................................................................................................................... 648
Paper ............................................................................................................................................................ 649
Copy Specications ....................................................................................................................................... 652
Fax Specications ......................................................................................................................................... 653
Scanner Specications .................................................................................................................................. 654
Printer Specications .................................................................................................................................... 655
Specications for E-Mail Sending and Receiving (MF249dw / MF247dw) ....................................................... 656
Specications for Scanning to Shared Folders (MF249dw / MF247dw) .......................................................... 657
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 658
Manuals Included with the Machine ................................................................................................................ 659
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 660
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 661
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 665
Others ................................................................................................................................................................ 666
Basic Windows Operations ........................................................................................................................... 667
Menu Route Map .......................................................................................................................................... 676
Notice ........................................................................................................................................................... 677
Appendix
628
Appendix
1469-0AU
This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
Appendix
629
Third Party Software
1469-0F7
For information related to third-party software, click the following icon.
Appendix
630
Feature Highlights
1469-0AW
Give the features that are described in this section a try. The features are grouped under four headings: "Going Green
and Saving Money," "Improving Eciency," "Going Digital," and "So Much More."
Appendix
631
Going Green and Saving Money
1469-0AX
2-Sided Printing (MF249dw / MF247dw)
You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from your computer, and even incoming faxes. Because
you'll only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can cut your paper costs in half. The <Paper Save>
button enables you to save even more paper by allowing you to simultaneously select the settings for 2-sided
copying and for copying multiple pages onto one sheet.
●To make 2-sided copies: 2-Sided Copying (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 91)
●To save paper when you copy: Using the <Paper Save> Button(P. 96)
●To print 2-sided documents from your computer: Switching 1-Sided and 2-Sided Printing (MF249dw /
MF247dw)(P. 203)
●To print 2-Sided incoming faxes: Print on Both Sides(P. 504)
Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet
To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages onto a single sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies, and up to 16
pages for print jobs sent from your computer. This is even more effective when used together with 2-sided
printing.
●To copy multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet
(2 on 1/4 on 1)(P. 94)
●To save paper when you copy: Using the <Paper Save> Button(P. 96)
●To print multiple pages of a document onto one sheet: Printing Multiple Pages onto One Sheet(P. 207)
Appendix
632
Sleep Mode
For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that powers down a machine when nobody is using it has become
an essential feature. This machine will enter sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to sleep whenever
you want. Press once to put the machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the machine back into
action.
For more information about this function, see Entering Sleep Mode(P. 76) .
Save Toner
Got multi-page documents or drafts that don't need presentation-quality printing?
There's a setting that uses less toner. Give it a try and save toner and money.
For more information about this function, see Saving Toner(P. 220) .
Paperless Faxing
Assume you need paper to fax? Those old paper printouts you always make are a thing of the past. Send
documents by fax just as they are, created on your computer. It's paperless, so it's fast. And, received
documents are rst stored in memory, allowing you to print out only those needed and eliminating worry about
paper getting used on direct mailings, etc.
●To send documents from the computer as faxes: Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 167)
●To store received documents into memory: Storing Received Faxes into Memory (Memory Reception)
(P. 150)
Appendix
633
Canon strives to be environmentally and energy conscious in all aspects of its
operations. Click here to learn about the ways in which Canon is helping to protect the
environment.
Appendix
634
Improving Eciency
1469-0AY
Address Book
Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book saves you the inconvenience of entering them number-
by-number, letter-by-letter every time you have something to send. By registering destinations that you
frequently send to <One-Touch>, you can quickly display them anytime. You can save your Address Book data
on your computer and feel secure knowing that your important contact information is backed up.
●To use the machine to enter addresses in the Address Book: Registering in the Address Book(P. 60)
●To use your computer to enter addresses in the Address Book: Registering Address Book from
Remote UI(P. 467)
●To select an Address Book address as a fax destination: Specifying from Address Book(P. 121)
●To select an Address Book address as an e-mail destination: Specifying from Address Book(P. 273)
●To save Address Book addresses on your computer or to export Address Book addresses from your
computer to the machine, using the Remote UI: Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote
UI(P. 463)
●To save Address Book addresses on your computer or export Address Book addresses from your
computer to the machine using the supplied software: Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with
the Supplied Software(P. 165)
Shortcut Keys for Copying and Scanning
Take advantage of the shortcut keys on the operation panel so you don't have to recongure the same settings
over and over again. The <Paper Save> button enables you to save paper by allowing you to copy two or four
pages onto one sheet. If you are using a machine capable of 2-sided printing, you can also copy on both sides of
the sheet. For scanning, use the <Scan -> PC1> / <Scan -> PC2> buttons to preset your favorite save destinations,
scan types, and le formats. Just place your document and touch one of these shortcut keys to scan.
Appendix
635
●To save paper when you copy: Using the <Paper Save> Button(P. 96)
●To easily scan documents: Scanning Using the <Scan -> PC> Button(P. 237)
Remote Management with Remote UI
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all without having to go over to the machine. Congure
settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface
that you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for things other than taking care of the machine.
For more information about this function, see Using Remote UI (P. 449) .
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive Operation
You can easily specify the page layout as well as binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-sided
printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows you to
conveniently make settings while viewing how settings are applied.
For more information, see Printing a Document(P. 191) .
Appendix
636
Going Digital
1469-0C0
Scan and E-Mail (MF249dw / MF247dw)
E-mail scanned documents without even turning on your computer. Just convert your scanned document into
an e-mail attachment right from the machine. If you're one of those people who'd rather send a fax than mess
around with a computer, this feature is for you.
For more information about this function, see Sending Documents as E-Mails Directly from the
Machine(P. 246) .
Scan and Share (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Say you've got a paper copy of a report for a company-wide meeting. Scan it, convert it, and now everyone can
see it. It's saved directly in a shared folder on your network, so there's no need to print out copies and pass
them out. Once you start talking about hundreds of pages of documents that everyone needs, there's just no
other way to go.
For more information about this function, see Saving Documents Directly in Shared Folder(P. 253) .
Scan Only What You Need
Appendix
637
What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but all you're really interested in is a headline and a
photo? Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a preview, and then have the scanner disregard
the rest. Otherwise you'll have to use an editing program to crop out everything you don't need.
●Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such
images as scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and
may result in criminal and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about the legality of using your product
to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the use of the images
scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for
guidance.
For more information about this function, see Conguring Scan Settings in ScanGear MF(P. 244) .
Searchable PDFs
Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a "searchable PDF*". By scanning an original with both text and
images, text portions are converted by OCR into text data. In addition to being able to search for text
information, you can also copy required portions into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in Microsoft
Oce. Eliminate the need to type in customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.
* You cannot create a searchable PDF in the Mac OS environment.
For more information about scanning from a computer, see Scanning from a Computer(P. 241) .
Add Images to a Work in Progress
Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned images directly into documents
you're working on. This way you can skip the steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the
scanned images and then exporting them to the application you're really using.
Appendix
638
For more information about this function, see Scanning Using an Application(P. 242) .
Appendix
639
So Much More
1469-0C1
Using a smartphone/tablet
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, or scan materials handed out at a meeting using a smartphone, Canon PRINT Business
or Canon Print Service comes in handy. Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can connect to
the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities for work/play with functionality made for this age
of speed.
For more information, see Can Be Used Conveniently with a Mobile Device (P. 289) .
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or cell phone, send your data, and out come your printed
documents. With this machine, Google Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever you want from
wherever you want.
For more information about this function, see Using Google Cloud Print(P. 308) .
Go Wireless (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Appendix
640
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings
process altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use
document system that you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free
wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.
For more information about this function, see Connecting to a Wireless LAN (MF249dw / MF247dw)
(P. 319) .
Get Faxes Wherever You Go (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Never worry about missing a fax when you're out of the oce. Set a forwarding destination and any fax that
comes in on the machine will go right to you. Better yet, make the forwarding destination the e-mail address for
your tablet or mobile.
For more information about this function, see Forwarding Received Faxes(P. 154) .
Make Posters
Blow up a regular one-sheet printout and make an exceptionally large poster. A large poster will be printed out
on nine sheets. Put them together in a 3x3 grid, and voila!
For more information about this function, see Printing Posters(P. 209) .
Make Booklets (MF249dw / MF247dw)
Sometimes your documents deserve better presentation than a staple in the upper-left corner. Making booklets
is easy. The print driver will take care of the page positioning for you. All you have to do is fold the pages and
staple them along the middle.
Appendix
641
For more information about this function, see Printing Booklet (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 211) .
Appendix
642
Specications
1469-0C2
The machine specications are subject to change without prior notice due to improvements of the machine.
Machine Specications(P. 644)
Wireless LAN Specications (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 646)
Document Type(P. 647)
Scan Area(P. 648)
Paper(P. 649)
Copy Specications(P. 652)
Fax Specications (P. 653)
Scanner Specications(P. 654)
Printer Specications(P. 655)
Specications for E-Mail Sending and Receiving (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 656)
Specications for Scanning to Shared Folders (MF249dw / MF247dw)(P. 657)
Appendix
643
Machine Specications
1469-0C3
Type Personal Desktop
Power Supply*1 110 to 127 V, 50/60 Hz
(Power requirements differ depending on the country in which you purchased
the product.)
Power Consumption Maximum
1,050 W or less
Average consumption during standby mode
- MF249dw / MF247dw
Approx. 5.6 W
- MF236n
Approx. 5.1 W
Average consumption during sleep mode
- MF249dw / MF247dw
Approx. 1.2 W (by USB Connections)
Approx. 1.3 W (by Wired Connections)
Approx. 2.0 W (by Wireless Connections)
- MF236n
Approx. 1.1 W (by USB Connections)
Approx. 1.3 W (by Wired Connections)
When the power switch is turned OFF
0.5 W or less
Warm-up Time*2
(From power ON until machine enters standby)
13.5 seconds or less
Weight*3 - MF249dw
Approx. 30.2 lb (13.7 kg)
- MF247dw
Approx. 28.2 lb (12.8 kg)
- MF236n
Approx. 26.7 lb (12.1 kg)
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
- MF249dw
15 3/8" x 14 7/8" x 14 1/4" (390 x 378 x 360 mm)
- MF247dw / MF236n
15 3/8" x 14 5/8" x 14 1/4" (390 x 371 x 360 mm)
Environmental Conditions Temperature: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)
Host Interface 100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Hi-Speed USB
IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Infrastructure mode)*4
*1 The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption.
*2 Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.
*3 The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges.
*4 MF249dw / MF247dw only.
*5 Indicates that the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the background noise level.
Appendix
644
Noise
(measured in accordance with ISO 7779, declared
noise emission in accordance with ISO 9296)
LwAd (Declared A-weighted sound power level (1 B = 10 dB))
- MF249dw / MF247dw
During standby mode: Inaudible*5
During printing: 6.6 B or less (1-sided)
During printing: 6.6 B or less (2-sided)
- MF236n
During standby mode: Inaudible*5
During printing: 6.5 B or less (1-sided)
LpAm (Declared A-weighted emission sound pressure level (Bystander
position))
- MF249dw
During standby mode: Inaudible*5
During printing: Approx. 51 dB (1-sided)
During printing: Approx. 52 dB (2-sided)
- MF247dw
During standby mode: Inaudible*5
During printing: Approx. 52 dB (1-sided)
During printing: Approx. 52 dB (2-sided)
- MF236n
During standby mode: Inaudible*5
During printing: Approx. 51 dB (1-sided)
Acceptable Documents Supported Document Types(P. 647)
Acceptable Paper Stock Paper(P. 649)
Printable Range Printable Area(P. 650)
Scan Range Scan Area(P. 648)
*1 The current value displayed on the rating label indicates average current consumption.
*2 Warm-up time may vary depending on the use conditions and environment of the machine.
*3 The value indicates the mass of the main unit including toner cartridges.
*4 MF249dw / MF247dw only.
*5 Indicates that the sound pressure level of each bystander position is below the ISO 7779 absolute criteria for the background noise level.
Appendix
645
Wireless LAN Specications
1469-0C4
Standard IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11n
Frequency Range 2,412 to 2,462 MHz
Communication Mode Infrastructure Mode / Access Point Mode
Security Infrastructure Mode
WEP, WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP), WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
Appendix
646
Document Type
1469-0C5
◼Supported Document Types
Platen Glass Feeder
Size
(W x L)
Up to 8 1/2" x 11 3/4" (216 x 297 mm) MF249dw
Maximum size:8 1/2" x 14" (216 x 356 mm)
Minimum size: 5 1/2" x 5" (140 x 127 mm)
MF247dw / MF236n
Maximum size: 8 1/2" x 14" (216 x 356 mm)
Minimum size: 5 7/8" x 4 1/8" (148 x 105 mm)
Weight 1-sided documents
13.3 to 27.9 lb Bond (50 to 105 g/m²)
2-sided documents *
16.0 to 27.9 lb Bond (60 to 105 g/m² )
Paper Capacity 1 sheet MF249dw
Up to 50 sheets (Letter, 21.3 lb Bond [80 g/m²])
MF247dw / MF236n
Up to 35 sheets (Letter, 21.3 lb Bond [80 g/m²])
*MF249dw only.
Appendix
647
Scan Area
1469-0C6
The shaded areas in the table below indicate the scan area of the document. Make sure that text and images in your
documents t within the shaded area. The scan area varies depending on the function used and where documents are
placed (in the feeder or on the platen glass).
Platen Glass Feeder
Copy
The scan area for copying may differ from the
printable area. Printable Area(P. 650)
The scan area for copying may differ from the
printable area. Printable Area(P. 650)
Fax
Scan Saving in a Computer Saving in a Computer
Sending by E-mail/Sending to a File Server
(MF249dw / MF247dw)
Sending by E-mail/Sending to a File Server
(MF249dw / MF247dw)
Appendix
648
Paper
1469-0C7
◼Supported Paper Sizes
Paper sizes that can be loaded in the paper drawer, and the manual feed slot are listed below.
A4 (8 1/4" x 11 3/4" [210 x 297 mm])*1 *2
B5 (7 1/8" x 10 1/8" [182 x 257 mm])
A5 (5 7/8" x 8 1/4" [148 x 210 mm])
Legal (8 1/2" x 14" [216 x 356 mm])*1
Letter (8 1/2" x 11" [216 x 279 mm])*1 *2
Statement (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" [140 x 216 mm])
Executive (7 1/4" x 10 1/2" [184 x 267 mm])
Ocio (8 1/2" x 12 1/2" [216 x 318 mm])*1
Ocio (Brazil) (8 1/2" x 14" [216 x 355 mm])*1
Ocio (Mexico) (8 1/2" x 13 3/8" [216 x 341 mm])*1
Letter (Government) (8" x 10 1/2" [203 x 267 mm])
Legal (Government) (8" x 13" [203 x 330 mm])
Foolscap (8 1/2" x 13" [216 x 330 mm])*1
Foolscap (Australia) (8 1/8" x 13 3/8" [206 x 338 mm])
Legal (India) (8 1/2" x 13 5/8" [215 x 345 mm])*1
F4A (8 1/2" x 13 1/2" [216 x 343 mm])*1
Envelope No. 10 (COM10) (4 1/8" x 9 1/2" [104.7 x 241.3 mm])
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8" x 7 1/2" [98.4 x 190.5 mm])*3
Envelope C5 (6 3/8" x 9" [162 x 229 mm])
Envelope DL (4 3/8" x 8 5/8" [110 x 220 mm])
3x5inch (3" x 5" [76 x 127 mm])*3
Custom*4
*1 Only in MF249dw / MF247dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*2 The machine can print received fax documents.
*3 You can load Envelope Monarch and 3x5inch only in the manual feed slot.
*4 Custom paper size of 3" to 8 1/2" (76.2 to 216.0 mm) in width and 8 1/4" to 14" (210 to 356.0 mm) in length can be loaded
in the paper drawer. Custom paper size of 3" to 8 1/2" (76.2 to 216.0 mm) in width and 5" to 14" (127 to 356.0 mm) in length
can be loaded in the manual feed slot.
Appendix
649
The default paper size of the machine is set to Letter. Change the paper size setting when using a
different size of paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 56)
◼Paper Type and Paper Source Capacity
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
Paper Type Paper Capacity for
Paper Drawer
Paper Capacity for
Manual Feed Slot
Plain paper*1
16 to 21 lb Bond (60 to 80 g/m²) 250 sheets 1 sheet
22 to 23 lb Bond (81 to 89 g/m²) 170 sheets 1 sheet
Heavy paper*2
24 to 28 lb Bond (90 to 105 g/m²) 170 sheets 1 sheet
28 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (106 to
163 g/m²) 100 sheets 1 sheet
Recycled paper*1
16 to 21 lb Bond (60 to 80 g/m²) 250 sheets 1 sheet
22 to 23 lb Bond (81 to 89 g/m²) 170 sheets 1 sheet
Color paper*1
16 to 21 lb Bond (60 to 80 g/m²) 250 sheets 1 sheet
22 to 23 lb Bond (81 to 89 g/m²) 170 sheets 1 sheet
Bond paper*3 16 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (60 to 163
g/m²) 100 sheets 1 sheet
Label 100 sheets 1 sheet
Envelope 20 sheets 1 sheet
*1 Only in MF249dw / MF247dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
*2 Only in MF249dw / MF247dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available for heavy paper 1 (24 to 32 lb Bond (90 to 120 g/m²)).
*3 Only in MF249dw / MF247dw, automatic 2-sided printing is available for bond paper 1 (16 to 24 lb Bond (60 to 90 g/m²)) and bond
paper 2 (25 to 32 lb Bond (91 to 120 g/m²)).
◼Paper Type and Setting for the Machine
Loading Paper(P. 45)
◼Printable Area
The shaded areas in the image below indicate the printable area of the document.
Appendix
650
Appendix
651
Copy Specications
1469-0C8
Scan Resolution Text/Photo (High Speed)
300 x 600 dpi
Text/Photo, Photo, Text
600 x 600 dpi
Output Resolution 600 x 600 dpi
Copy Ratio 100% Direct, 400% Max, 200%, 129% STMT->LTR, 78% LGL-
>LTR, 64% LTR->STMT, 50%, 25% Min
Copy Speed*
(Letter Plain Direct)
MF249dw / MF247dw
28 cpm
MF236n
24 cpm
Continuous Copying Capacity Maximum 999 copies
First Copy Time
(Letter)
Platen glass: 8.7 seconds or less
Feeder: 14 seconds or less
* The copy speed on Letter size plain paper on one-side printing is measured during continuous copying. Copy speeds vary depending on the
output resolution, the paper type and size, and the paper feeding direction. Copy speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower. Plus, the machine
may experience downtime or decrease the copy speed in the middle of a continuous copy run to adjust the temperature inside the machine or
maintain the optimal print quality.
Appendix
652
Fax Specications
1469-0C9
Line Used Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)* 1
Communication Mode Super G3, G3
Compression Method MH, MR, MMR
Modem Speed Super G3: 33.6 Kbps, G3: 14.4 Kbps
Automatic Fallback
Transmission Speed Approx. 3 seconds per page*2
(ECM-MMR, transmitting from the memory at 33.6 Kbps)
Sending from Memory/Receiving
in Memory
Maximum approx. 256 pages*2 (Total pages of transmission/reception)
(Maximum number of fax jobs that can be sent from the memory: 10 jobs/Maximum
number of fax jobs that can be received into the memory: 90 jobs)
Fax Resolution Normal: 200 x 100 dpi
Fine: 200 x 200 dpi
Photo: 200 x 200 dpi
Superne: 200 x 400 dpi
Dialing One-touch keys (4 destinations)
Coded dialing (100 destinations)
Group dialing (103 groups)
Address Book dialing
Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
Automatic redialing
Manual redialing
Sequential broadcast (114 destinations)
Reports TX Result Report
Communication Management Report
(By default, auto output every 40 destinations)
RX Result Report
Telephone Type External telephone/External telephone with the built-in answer function/Data modem
*1 Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this case, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
*2 Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector) Standard Chart No. 1, MMR standard mode.
Appendix
653
Scanner Specications
1469-0CA
Type Color scanner
Maximum Scan Size Platen glass: up to 8 1/2" x 11 3/4" (216 x 297 mm)
Feeder: up to 8 1/2" x 14" (216 x 356 mm)
Scan Resolution Optical resolution
Platen glass: up to 600 x 600 dpi
Feeder: up to 300 x 300 dpi
Software interpolation resolution
9,600 x 9,600 dpi
Scan Speed*
(Letter, 300 x 300 dpi)
Color: Approx. 4 seconds/sheet
Black and White: Approx. 3 seconds/sheet
Driver TWAIN
WIA 2.0
ICA
* Speed of scanning via the platen glass. The communication time is not included.
Appendix
654
Printer Specications
1469-0CC
Output Tray Capacity*1
(a fresh stack of Letter size paper)
Approx. 100 sheets (18 lb Bond [68 g/m²])
Print Speed*2
(Letter Plain Direct)
MF249dw / MF247dw
28 ppm
MF236n
24 ppm
First Print Time*3
(Letter)
6 seconds or less
Print Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi (1,200 dpi equivalent x 1,200 dpi equivalent)
Gradation 256 gradations
Toner Cartridges Consumables(P. 658)
*1 May vary depending on the installation environment and paper type used.
*2 The print speed on Letter size plain paper on one-side printing is measured during continuous printing. Print speeds vary depending on the
output resolution, the paper type and size, and the paper feeding direction. Print speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower. Plus, the machine
may experience downtime or decrease the print speed in the middle of a continuous print run to adjust the temperature inside the machine or
maintain the optimal print quality.
*3 May vary depending on the output environment.
Appendix
655
Specications for E-Mail Sending and
Receiving
1469-0CE
Communication Protocol SMTP, POP3*
Data Format PDF, PDF (Compact), JPEG, TIFF
Resolution JPEG: 300 dpi
TIFF (Black and White): 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
TIFF (Color): 300 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF (Black and White): 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
PDF (Color): 200 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF (Compact): Text 300 dpi, Background 150 dpi
System Environment Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012
Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Mac OS X
Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.11 b/g/n (Infrastructure mode)
Color Mode Color, Black and White
Inputted Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Paper Size LTR, LGL, STMT
* POP3 can also be used, though limited to when authenticating before sending.
Appendix
656
Specications for Scanning to Shared
Folders
1469-0CF
Communication Protocol SMB (TCP/IP)
Data Format PDF, PDF (Compact), JPEG, TIFF
Resolution JPEG: 300 dpi
TIFF (Black and White): 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
TIFF (Color): 300 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF (Black and White): 300 dpi (MMR Compression)
PDF (Color): 200 dpi (JPEG Compression)
PDF (Compact): Text 300 dpi, Background 150 dpi
System Environment Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012
Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Mac OS X
Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.11 b/g/n (Infrastructure mode)
Color Mode Color, Black and White
Inputted Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Paper Size LTR, LGL, STMT
Appendix
657
Consumables
1469-0CH
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in this machine. Purchase
consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe safety and health precautions when storing and handling
consumables ( Consumables(P. 10) ).
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is
recommended.
●Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or document type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
●Replacement toner cartridges are different from the supplied toner cartridges, so the yield may also differ.
◼Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridges
The average yield* of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine is 1,700
sheets.
* The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for
the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers
and multi-function devices that contain printer components" issued by ISO [International
Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default print
density setting.
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield of toner cartridge *
Canon Cartridge 137 2,400 sheets
When replacing toner cartridges How to Replace Toner Cartridges(P. 603)
LINKS
Replacing Toner Cartridges(P. 598)
Appendix
658
Manuals Included with the Machine
1469-0CJ
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup procedures, from
removing the packing materials to setting up the machine.
User's Guide (This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual
that is viewed using a Web browser. You can browse information by
category or enter a keyword to search for pages on a specic topic.
Using User's Guide(P. 660)
Send Setting Guide (MF249dw /
MF247dw)
This manual describes how to congure settings and prepare for
sending scanned images by e-mail and saving scanned images to
shared folders.
Appendix
659
Using User's Guide
1469-0CK
The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer, smartphone, or other similar device.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
You can nd the page you are looking for using the following 2 methods.
Search the contents
You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from [Contents] on the left side of the screen.
Top Page(P. 661)
Topic Page(P. 663)
Search by keyword
Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "fax" or "wireless LAN", and the pages containing the keyword
are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter phrases such as
"connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for multiple keywords.
Search(P. 663)
System Requirements
●If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as
PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
Appendix
660
Screen Layout of User's Guide
1469-0CS
The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when the User's Guide starts.
Contents
The titles of chapters are displayed.
/
Click to display all items, including those nested underneath other items. Click to return to the
original list.
/
Click to switch between the table of contents and the search display.
Appendix
661
Click to specify settings such as text size, layout, and display method for the User's Guide.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
Feature Highlights
Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine. Click / / / to toggle the
display by category, or click the sliding display for more information about each category. The sliding display
can be stopped by moving the pointer onto it. Feature Highlights(P. 662)
[Quick Help]
Click to view how to solve problems.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
Feature Highlights
Provides a variety of practical examples of ways to use the machine.
/
Click to display the detailed information. Click to close the window.
Appendix
662
Click to display the corresponding topic page.
Topic Page
Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
/
Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to go to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web browser.
Click to return to the page top.
Search
Click to display the search screen. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page
you are looking for.
Appendix
663
[Enter keyword(s) here]
Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. Search for pages containing all
keywords by spacing keywords apart. Search for only pages with exact matches by enclosing keyword
phrases in double quotation marks.
Search result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
●Specied keywords appear in bold in search results.
Appendix
664
Viewing User's Guide
1469-0CU
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay
attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not
performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to these
cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items
carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or
property.
Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a
procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type Example
Keys on the operation panel
Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer Settings>
<Specify destination.>
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
Screens Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the MF249dw. Depending on the
operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from the
actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the MF249dw. When differences are
signicant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as "MFXXXX / MFXXXX."
Appendix
665
Others
1469-0CX
This section describes basic Windows operations and includes disclaimers, copyright information, and other
information. From here you can also display a Menu Route Map (in PDF format) that summarizes the setting menu
using a list.
Appendix
666
Basic Windows Operations
1469-0F8
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 667)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 668)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 668)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 669)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 670)
Checking the Computer Name(P. 671)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 672)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 673)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected(P. 674)
◼Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].
Windows 10
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and printers].
Windows Server 2003
[Start] select [Printers and Faxes].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].
◼Enabling [Network discovery]
If you are using Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012, enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on
your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Network discovery].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows 10
Appendix
667
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network
discovery] under [Network discovery].
◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2003/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].
Windows 10
Click [ ] select [File Explorer].
2Select [Network] or [My Network Places] in printer server.
●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠Shared printers are displayed.
1
◼Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided DVD-
ROM, follow the procedure below. The DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual. The DVD-ROM drive
name may differ depending on the computer you are using.
Appendix
668
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
Windows 10
Click [Search the web and Windows] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click "D:\MInst.exe" displayed in the search
results
Windows Server 2003
[Start] [Run] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]
◼Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1Load Letter size paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Manual Feed
Slot(P. 50)
2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
3Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
Appendix
669
➠The test page is printed.
◼Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10
Proceed to step 2.
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows 10
Click [ ] select [Settings] [System] [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
Appendix
670
◼Checking the Computer Name
Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008/Server 2012
1Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10
Proceed to step 2.
2Display [System].
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].
Windows 10
Click [ ] select [Settings] [System] [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3Check the computer name.
Appendix
671
Windows Server 2003
1[Start] select [Control Panel] [System].
2Click [Change] in [Computer Name] tab.
3Check the computer name.
◼Checking the Printer Port
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Appendix
672
3In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
●If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the
same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard
TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 351)
◼Checking Bidirectional Communication
1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 667)
Appendix
673
2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer Is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , or in the system tray to display the SSID of
the connected wireless LAN router.
Appendix
674
Appendix
675
Menu Route Map
1469-0E0
For the settings on the machine's display, see "Menu Route Map" (PDF manual).
Appendix
676
Notice
1469-0E1
◼International ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has determined that this product meets the
ENERGY STAR Program for energy eciency.
The International ENERGY STAR Oce Equipment Program is an international program that
promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other oce equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors
can participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are oce equipment, such as computers, displays, printers,
facsimiles, and copiers. The standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
◼IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1
established by the IPv6 Forum.
◼Disclaimers
●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
◼Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Safari, Mac, Mac OS and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Appendix
677
Adobe, PostScript, and the PostScript logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright © 2007 -08 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,737,599; 5,781,785; 5,819,301; 5,929,866; 5,943,063; 6,073,148; 6,515,763; 6,639,593;
6,754,382; 7,046,403; 7,213,269; 7,242,415; Patents pending in the U.S. and other countries.
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, PostScript, the PostScript logo, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The Adobe PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and
other countries.
Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved.
Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other
countries.
Appendix
678
All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems
Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'
implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.
Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item
refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed
by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript
language.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Portions of this software are copyright © 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
Appendix
679
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-----------------------------------------------------------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
-----------------------------------------------------------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source les, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
680
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or
binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
681
- 1 -
The Software Subjected to Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the License:
See Page
Adobe PDF Scan Library 2
bldimake 5
FreeType 6
snmp 11
Incl 14
JPEG 15
math 16
mDNSResponder 17
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared) 21
OpenSSL 22
xpm 26
- 2 -
Adobe PDF Scan Library
Portions use software under the following terms:
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.
______________________________________________________________________________________
This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 The Apache Software Foundation. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party
acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
apache@apache.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,
without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
- 3 -
This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software
Foundation and was originally based on software copyright (c) 1999, International Business Machines, Inc.,
http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see
<http://www.apache.org/>.
______________________________________________________________________________________
March 27, 2003
Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron
XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the
"License"). You may obtain a copy of
the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are
Copyright (C) 2000 Ginger Alliance Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated
are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:
http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp
The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:
https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/
______________________________________________________________________________________
Portions Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no
representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 4 -
The Loki Library
Portions Copyright (c) 2001 by Andrei Alexandrescu . This code accompanies the book: Alexandrescu,
Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".
Portions Copyright (c) 2001. Addison-Wesley. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this
software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any
purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
______________________________________________________________________________________
Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at
http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .
______________________________________________________________________________________
- 5 -
bldimake
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988 The Open Group
All right Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The above copyright
notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE
LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open
Group.
- 6 -
FreeType
The FreeType Project LICENSE
----------------------------
2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages;
some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and
which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license
affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs,
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion
and use of free software in commercial and freeware products
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution)
o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or
full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage)
o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use
it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge
- 7 -
somewhere in your documentation that you have used the
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus
encourage you to use the following text:
"""
Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
"""
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you
actually use.
Legal Terms
===========
0. Definitions
--------------
Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project',
and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally
distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha,
beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where
`using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'.
This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType
- 8 -
engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original
FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and
documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its
original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below.
1. No Warranty
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
-----------------
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and
irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile,
display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code
forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to
authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted
herein, subject to the following conditions:
o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to
the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered,
- 9 -
original files must be preserved in all copies of source
files.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of the work of the
FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use
our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid
to us.
3. Advertising
--------------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use
the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional
purposes without specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted
material, only this license, or another one contracted with the
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
4. Contacts
-----------
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
- 10 -
o freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as
future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.
If you are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues,
specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
- 11 -
snmp
Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
- 12 -
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
- 13 -
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University
Copyright 1989 TGV, Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and TGV not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission.
CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO
EVENT SHALL CMU OR TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF
USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
- 14 -
Incl
Copyright (c) 1994-96 SunSoft, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT INC. OR ITS
PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from SunSoft, Inc.
- 15 -
JPEG
"this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.".
- 16 -
math
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is
preserved.
copysignf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
math_private.h:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
powf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
scalbnf.c:* Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
- 17 -
mDNSResponder
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or
are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power,
direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)
ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software
source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media
types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided
in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from)
the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a
whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include
works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and
Derivative Works thereof.
- 18 -
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor
for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on
behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are
managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright
owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has
been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work
and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in
this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the
Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are
necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to
which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this
License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following
conditions:
a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
- 19 -
d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the
Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display
generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The
contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You
may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot
be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted
for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License,
without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or
modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or
product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin
of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work
and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract,
or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in
writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use
the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or
- 20 -
malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised
of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You
may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act
only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if
You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims
asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name
and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and limitations under the License.
- 21 -
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)
* Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
* and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
* contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
* software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/
- 22 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 23 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 24 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 25 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 26 -
xpm
Copyright (c) 1989-95 GROUPE BULL
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL GROUPE BULL BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of GROUPE BULL shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from GROUPE
BULL.

Navigation menu